TW201536541A - Cover glass, display device having cover glass, and method for producing cover glass - Google Patents

Cover glass, display device having cover glass, and method for producing cover glass Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201536541A
TW201536541A TW104104748A TW104104748A TW201536541A TW 201536541 A TW201536541 A TW 201536541A TW 104104748 A TW104104748 A TW 104104748A TW 104104748 A TW104104748 A TW 104104748A TW 201536541 A TW201536541 A TW 201536541A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
hole
cover glass
reinforcing portion
unit substrate
protective film
Prior art date
Application number
TW104104748A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI647098B (en
Inventor
Satoshi Emori
Shinsuke Nakazawa
Akiyoshi Uchida
Takashi Takekoshi
Original Assignee
Dainippon Printing Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2014024782A external-priority patent/JP6260322B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2014069994A external-priority patent/JP6331127B2/en
Application filed by Dainippon Printing Co Ltd filed Critical Dainippon Printing Co Ltd
Publication of TW201536541A publication Critical patent/TW201536541A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI647098B publication Critical patent/TWI647098B/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/133308Support structures for LCD panels, e.g. frames or bezels
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/133308Support structures for LCD panels, e.g. frames or bezels
    • G02F1/133331Cover glasses
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/041Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/041 - G06F3/045
    • G06F2203/04103Manufacturing, i.e. details related to manufacturing processes specially suited for touch sensitive devices

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
  • Surface Treatment Of Glass (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a cover glass that includes a reinforcing part having an appropriate degree of strength and ductility. The cover glass is provided with a unit substrate comprising glass and a reinforcing part which is provided on a side surface of the unit substrate and contains a resin material. The resin material that constitutes the reinforcing part has a polyene-polythiol-based resin that contains an ene compound and a thiol compound.

Description

覆蓋玻璃、附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置、以及覆蓋玻璃之製造方法 Cover glass, display device with cover glass, and manufacturing method of cover glass

本發明,係有關於被設置在顯示裝置上之覆蓋玻璃。又,本發明,係有關於設置有覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置。又,本發明,係有關於覆蓋玻璃之製造方法。 The present invention relates to a cover glass that is disposed on a display device. Further, the present invention relates to a display device provided with a cover glass. Moreover, the present invention relates to a method of producing a cover glass.

從先前技術起,在液晶顯示器或有機EL顯示器等之顯示裝置的觀察者側處設置用以保護顯示裝置之顯示面的覆蓋玻璃一事,係為周知。當在顯示裝置處設置有觸控面板之功能的情況時,覆蓋玻璃,係亦發揮對於顯示裝置和被設置在顯示裝置之觀察者側處的觸控面板感測器作保護之功用。另外,將覆蓋玻璃和觸控面板感測器一體性地構成一事,亦為周知。 From the prior art, it is known to provide a cover glass for protecting the display surface of the display device at the observer side of a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display. When the function of the touch panel is provided at the display device, the cover glass also functions to protect the display device and the touch panel sensor disposed at the observer side of the display device. In addition, it is also known that the cover glass and the touch panel sensor are integrally formed.

近年來,智慧型手機或平板PC等之附有顯示裝置之攜帶終端的普及係為顯著。在攜帶終端中,係對相對於在使用環境中所產生的落下衝擊之耐久性有所要求。故而,對於保護顯示裝置之覆蓋玻璃,係要求其具有能夠耐住頻繁產生之衝擊的高強度。在此種背景之下,例如在 專利文獻1中,係提案有:使用於表面上被形成了產生有壓縮應力之壓縮應力層的強化玻璃,來構成覆蓋玻璃。 In recent years, the popularity of portable terminals with display devices such as smart phones or tablet PCs has been remarkable. In the portable terminal, there is a requirement for the durability against the drop impact generated in the use environment. Therefore, for the cover glass for protecting the display device, it is required to have high strength capable of withstanding the frequently generated impact. In this context, for example in Patent Document 1 proposes to use a tempered glass on which a compressive stress layer having a compressive stress is formed on a surface thereof to constitute a cover glass.

在專利文獻1中,係藉由將大型之強化玻璃 分割並個片化,來製作出具有與各種的顯示裝置之尺寸相對應之尺寸的覆蓋玻璃。另外,強化玻璃之壓縮應力層,係為藉由化學處理或者是熱處理所形成在玻璃表面上者。 故而,當如同專利文獻1一般地而將大型之強化玻璃分割的情況時,於所得到的覆蓋玻璃之側面,係成為會露出產生有拉張應力之拉張應力層。因此,可以推測到,藉由專利文獻1中所記載之方法,係並無法製造出在側面處具有充分之強度的覆蓋玻璃。 In Patent Document 1, a large tempered glass is used. The film is divided and sliced to produce a cover glass having a size corresponding to the size of various display devices. Further, the compressive stress layer of the tempered glass is formed on the surface of the glass by chemical treatment or heat treatment. Therefore, when the large tempered glass is divided as in the case of Patent Document 1, the tensile stress layer on which the tensile stress is generated is exposed on the side surface of the obtained cover glass. Therefore, it is estimated that the cover glass having sufficient strength at the side surface cannot be manufactured by the method described in Patent Document 1.

另一方面,係提案有藉由在覆蓋玻璃之側面 上設置樹脂一事來提高覆蓋玻璃之側面的強度之手法。例如,在專利文獻2中,係提案有將包含有覆蓋玻璃之側面的覆蓋玻璃之外周面藉由塑膠膜來作邊緣處理之手法。作為邊緣處理方法,係提案有射出成形法、點注(dispensing)法、噴霧塗布法和滾輪塗布法等。作為塑膠膜的材料之例,係列舉有環氧系樹脂或者是丙烯酸系樹脂。 On the other hand, the proposal is made on the side of the cover glass. The method of setting the resin to improve the strength of the side covering the glass. For example, in Patent Document 2, a method of edge-treating a peripheral surface of a cover glass including a side surface of a cover glass by a plastic film is proposed. As the edge treatment method, an injection molding method, a dispensing method, a spray coating method, a roll coating method, and the like are proposed. Examples of the material of the plastic film include an epoxy resin or an acrylic resin.

[先前技術文獻] [Previous Technical Literature] [專利文獻] [Patent Literature]

[專利文獻1]日本特開2012-88946號公報 [Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-88946

[專利文獻2]日本特開2012-111688號公報 [Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2012-111688

當如同專利文獻2中所記載一般地而藉由塑膠膜來對於覆蓋玻璃之外周面進行邊緣處理的情況時,構成塑膠膜之樹脂材料係成為對於大氣等之外部環境而露出。另一方面,當將樹脂材料設置於特定之場所處時,通常,首先係將以具有特定之流動性的方式來作了調整的樹脂材料塗布在對象物上,之後,實施藉由使樹脂材料之聚合反應產生來使樹脂材料硬化或固化的工程。故而,被設置在覆蓋玻璃之外周面處的塑膠膜,係成為基於在對於大氣等之外部環境而有所露出的環境下所進行之聚合反應而形成者。另一方面,丙烯酸系樹脂,一般而言係具有高反應性。因此,在使用丙烯酸系樹脂來構成塑膠膜的情況時,聚合反應會被氧所阻礙,其結果,可以推測到,係無法充分地進行聚合反應,而無法得到塑膠膜之充分的硬度。 When the edge treatment of the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass is performed by a plastic film as described in Patent Document 2, the resin material constituting the plastic film is exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere. On the other hand, when the resin material is placed at a specific place, generally, a resin material adjusted in such a manner as to have a specific fluidity is applied to the object, and then, by using a resin material. The polymerization reaction produces a process for hardening or solidifying the resin material. Therefore, the plastic film provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass is formed by a polymerization reaction performed in an environment exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere. On the other hand, an acrylic resin generally has high reactivity. Therefore, when a plastic film is formed using an acrylic resin, the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, it is estimated that the polymerization reaction cannot be sufficiently performed, and sufficient hardness of the plastic film cannot be obtained.

又,對於被設置在覆蓋玻璃之外周面處的塑膠膜,係為了能夠保護覆蓋玻璃免於受到衝擊的傷害,而要求有相當高的硬度。另一方面,若是塑膠膜之硬度過高,則塑膠膜會變脆,其結果,塑膠膜之韌性會降低。另一方面,環氧系樹脂,一般而言係具有高硬度,例如係具有D90左右之硬度。因此,在可能會被頻繁地施加衝擊之 覆蓋玻璃的用途中,可以推測到,使用環氧系樹脂係並不適當。另外,所謂「D90』,係指藉由型態D之硬度計來進行測定時所得到的硬度之值乃身為「90」。 Further, the plastic film provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass is required to have a relatively high hardness in order to protect the cover glass from impact damage. On the other hand, if the hardness of the plastic film is too high, the plastic film becomes brittle, and as a result, the toughness of the plastic film is lowered. On the other hand, the epoxy resin generally has a high hardness and, for example, has a hardness of about D90. Therefore, it is possible to apply shock frequently In the use of the cover glass, it is presumed that it is not appropriate to use an epoxy resin. In addition, the term "D90" means that the value of the hardness obtained by the measurement of the hardness meter of the type D is "90".

第1之本發明,係為對於此種事態作考慮所 進行者,並以提供一種具備由適當之樹脂材料所構成的補強部之覆蓋玻璃以及附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置一事,作為目的。 The first invention of this invention is for consideration of such a state of affairs. The present inventors aim to provide a cover glass having a reinforcing portion made of a suitable resin material and a display device with a cover glass.

又,在智慧型手機或平板PC等之攜帶終端 中,通常,通話用之揚聲器或用以對於使用者進行攝影之內側攝像機,係被設置在攜帶終端之前面側。於此情況,為了提昇音質或畫質,係會有在覆蓋玻璃中之與揚聲器或內側攝像機相重疊的部份處被形成有貫通孔的情況。另一方面,形成有貫通孔一事,係代表著在貫通孔之周邊的覆蓋玻璃之耐衝擊性會有所降低。耐衝擊性之降低,當在貫通孔之壁面上露出有強化玻璃之拉張應力層的情況時,係會變得更加顯著。然而,在本案發明者所知道的範圍內,於先前技術中,雖係針對覆蓋玻璃之側面的補強方法而進行有多數的提案,但是針對貫通孔之壁面的補強方法,則並未作太多的檢討。 Also, a portable terminal such as a smart phone or a tablet PC In general, a speaker for a call or an inner camera for photographing a user is provided on the front side of the portable terminal. In this case, in order to improve the sound quality or the image quality, a through hole may be formed in a portion of the cover glass that overlaps the speaker or the inside camera. On the other hand, the formation of the through-holes means that the impact resistance of the cover glass around the through-holes is lowered. When the impact resistance is lowered, the tensile stress layer of the tempered glass is exposed on the wall surface of the through hole, and the system becomes more conspicuous. However, in the range known to the inventors of the present invention, in the prior art, although many proposals have been made for the reinforcing method for covering the side surface of the glass, the reinforcing method for the wall surface of the through hole has not been made too much. Review.

第2之本發明,係為對於此種事態作考慮所 進行者,並以提供一種對於單位基材之貫通孔的壁面作了補強之覆蓋玻璃以及附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置一事,作為目的。 The second invention is for consideration of such a state of affairs. The present inventors have made it possible to provide a cover glass which is reinforced with respect to the wall surface of the through-hole of the unit substrate and a display device with a cover glass.

第1之本發明,係為一種覆蓋玻璃,其係為被設置於顯示裝置處之覆蓋玻璃,其特徵為,係具備有:單位基材,係包含有第1面、和與前述第1面相反側之第2面、以及在前述第1面和前述第2面之間而存在之側面,並含有玻璃;和補強部,係被設置在前述單位基材之側面上,並包含有樹脂材料,前述補強部之前述樹脂材料,係具有包含烯化合物以及硫醇化合物之聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂。 According to a first aspect of the invention, there is provided a cover glass which is a cover glass provided in a display device, characterized in that the unit substrate includes a first surface and a first surface The second surface on the opposite side and the side surface existing between the first surface and the second surface include glass; and the reinforcing portion is provided on the side surface of the unit substrate and contains a resin material The resin material of the reinforcing portion has a polyene-polythiol resin containing an olefin compound and a thiol compound.

在由第1之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦可構成為:前述補強部,係被設置在構成前述單位基材之外形的側面上,並具備有包含前述樹脂材料之側面用補強部。 In the cover glass according to the first aspect of the invention, the reinforcing portion may be provided on a side surface of the outer surface of the unit substrate, and may be provided with a side surface containing the resin material. unit.

在由第1之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦可構成為:於前述單位基材處,係被形成有貫通前述第1面以及前述第2面之貫通孔,前述補強部,係被設置在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔上,並具備有包含前述樹脂材料之孔用補強部。 In the cover glass according to the first aspect of the invention, the unit base material may be formed with a through hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface, and the reinforcing portion may be It is provided in the through hole of the unit substrate, and is provided with a hole reinforcing portion including the resin material.

在由第1之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦可構成為:在前述補強部之表面上,係至少部分性地被設置有呈現特定之顏色的裝飾部。 In the cover glass according to the first aspect of the invention, the surface of the reinforcing portion may be at least partially provided with a decorative portion that exhibits a specific color.

在由第1之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦可構成為:前述補強部之前述樹脂材料的聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,係包含有20~80重量%之烯化合物,和20~80重 量%之硫醇化合物。 In the cover glass according to the first aspect of the invention, the polyene-polythiol resin of the resin material in the reinforcing portion may include 20 to 80% by weight of an olefin compound, and 20~80 weight Amount of thiol compound.

第2之本發明,係為一種覆蓋玻璃,其係為 被設置於顯示裝置處之覆蓋玻璃,其特徵為,係具備有:單位基材,係包含有第1面、和與前述第1面相反側之第2面,並被形成有貫通前述第1面以及前述第2面之貫通孔,且含有玻璃;和孔用補強部,係被設置在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的壁面上,並包含有樹脂材料。 The second invention is a cover glass, which is The cover glass provided in the display device is characterized in that the unit substrate includes a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface, and is formed to penetrate the first surface The surface and the through hole of the second surface include glass; and the reinforcing portion for the hole is provided on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate, and includes a resin material.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:前述孔用補強部,係包含有從前述單位基材之前述第1面之端部起而朝向側方向延伸之第1面;和從前述單位基材之前述第2面之端部起而朝向側方向延伸之第2面;以及在前述孔用補強部之前述第1面和前述第2面之間而延展的側面,前述單位基材之前述第1面和前述孔用補強部之前述第1面之間的階差,係為10μm以下,前述單位基材之前述第2面和前述孔用補強部之前述第2面之間的階差,係為10μm以下。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The hole reinforcing portion may include a first surface extending in a side direction from an end portion of the first surface of the unit substrate, and a second surface end from the unit substrate a second surface extending toward the side direction and a side surface extending between the first surface and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion, wherein the first surface of the unit substrate and the hole are reinforced The step between the first faces of the portion is 10 μm or less, and the step between the second surface of the unit substrate and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion is 10 μm or less.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:前述單位基材,係包含有至少被形成於前述第1面以及前述第2面上之壓縮應力層;和位置在前述第1面側之前述壓縮應力層和前述第2面側之前述壓縮應力層之間的拉張應力層。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The unit substrate may include a compressive stress layer formed on at least the first surface and the second surface, and the compressive stress layer and the second surface side positioned on the first surface side. The tensile stress layer between the aforementioned compressive stress layers.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面上,前述拉張應力層係露出。於此情況,較理想,前述孔用補 強部,係以使於前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面處而露出的前述拉張應力層被前述孔用補強部所覆蓋的方式,而被形成。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The tensile stress layer may be exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate. In this case, it is preferable that the aforementioned hole is filled The strong portion is formed such that the tensile stress layer exposed at the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate is covered by the hole reinforcing portion.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:被設置在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面上之前述孔用補強部之被覆尺寸的最小值,係為20μm以上。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The minimum value of the coating size of the hole reinforcing portion provided on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate may be 20 μm or more.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面,係包含有:第1壁面,係與前述單位基材之前述第1面相交,並隨著接近前述單位基材之前述第2面側而朝向前述貫通孔之中心側延展;和第2壁面,係與前述單位基材之前述第2面相交,並隨著接近前述單位基材之前述第1面側而朝向前述貫通孔之中心側延展,之後與前述第1壁面會合。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The wall surface of the through-hole of the unit substrate may include a first wall surface that intersects the first surface of the unit substrate and that is adjacent to the second surface of the unit substrate a side extending toward the center side of the through hole; and a second wall surface intersecting the second surface of the unit substrate, and facing the first surface side of the unit substrate toward the center of the through hole The side is stretched and then merged with the first wall surface.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面,係隨著從前述單位基材之前述第2面側起朝向前述第1面側,而朝向前述貫通孔之中心側延展。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The wall surface of the through-hole of the unit substrate may be extended toward the center side of the through-hole from the second surface side of the unit substrate toward the first surface side.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:在前述單位基材之前述第1面側,係被設置有呈現特定之顏色的裝飾部,前述孔用補強部,係以與前述裝飾部呈現相同顏色的方式而被構成。又,係亦可構成為:前述裝飾部,係以當沿著前述覆蓋玻璃之法線方向來 作觀察的情況時會與前述孔用補強部相互重疊的方式,而被構成。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The decorative portion that exhibits a specific color may be provided on the first surface side of the unit substrate, and the hole reinforcing portion may be configured to have the same color as the decorative portion. Moreover, the decorative portion may be configured to follow the normal direction of the cover glass. In the case of observation, the hole reinforcing portions are overlapped with each other.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:前述孔用補強部,係以呈現特定之顏色的方式而被構成。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The hole reinforcing portion may be configured to present a specific color.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:在前述單位基材之前述第1面側,係被設置有觸控面板感測部之至少一部分。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, At least a part of the touch panel sensing unit may be provided on the first surface side of the unit substrate.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:前述孔用補強部之前述樹脂材料,係包含有聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, The resin material of the hole reinforcing portion may be a polyene-polythiol resin.

在由第2之本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃中,係亦 可構成為:前述孔用補強部之前述側面中的與前述孔用補強部之前述第1面相交的部份或者是與前述第2面相交的部份之至少其中一方,係被加工成圓角面或者是倒角面。 In the cover glass caused by the second invention, At least one of a portion of the side surface of the hole reinforcing portion that intersects the first surface of the hole reinforcing portion or a portion that intersects the second surface may be formed into a circle. An angled surface or a chamfered surface.

本發明,係為一種附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置, 其特徵為:係具備有顯示裝置、和被配置於前述顯示裝置處之覆蓋玻璃,前述覆蓋玻璃,係由上述記載之覆蓋玻璃所成。 The invention is a display device with a cover glass, It is characterized in that it is provided with a display device and a cover glass disposed at the display device, and the cover glass is made of the cover glass described above.

本發明,係為一種覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,該 覆蓋玻璃,係被設置於顯示裝置處,並且被形成有貫通孔,該覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其特徵為,係具備有:準備工程,係準備單位基材,該單位基材,係包含有第1面、和與前述第1面相反側之第2面,並被形成有貫通前述第 1面以及前述第2面之貫通孔,且含有玻璃;和塗布工程,係在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的壁面上,塗布包含有樹脂材料之塗布液;和硬化工程,係使前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的壁面上之塗布液硬化,而在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的壁面上形成孔用補強部。 The invention is a method for manufacturing a cover glass, A cover glass is provided in a display device and is formed with a through hole. The method for producing a cover glass is characterized in that: a preparation process is provided to prepare a unit substrate, and the unit substrate includes The first surface and the second surface opposite to the first surface are formed to penetrate the first surface a through hole having a surface on the first surface and the second surface, and a coating process, wherein a coating liquid containing a resin material is applied to a wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate; and a curing process is performed on the unit The coating liquid on the wall surface of the through hole of the substrate is cured, and a hole reinforcing portion is formed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate.

在由本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法中, 係亦可構成為:前述單位基材,係包含有至少被形成於前述第1面以及前述第2面上之壓縮應力層;和位置在前述第1面側之前述壓縮應力層和前述第2面側之前述壓縮應力層之間的拉張應力層。 In the method of manufacturing the cover glass caused by the present invention, The unit substrate may include a compressive stress layer formed on at least the first surface and the second surface, and the compressive stress layer on the first surface side and the second surface. A tensile stress layer between the aforementioned compressive stress layers on the face side.

在由本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法中, 係亦可構成為:在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面上,前述拉張應力層係露出。於此情況,較理想,前述孔用補強部,係以使於前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面處而露出的前述拉張應力層被前述孔用補強部所覆蓋的方式,而被形成。 In the method of manufacturing the cover glass caused by the present invention, The tensile stress layer may be exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate. In this case, it is preferable that the hole reinforcing portion is such that the tensile stress layer exposed at the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate is covered by the hole reinforcing portion. form.

在由本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法之前 述塗布工程中,前述單位基材之前述貫通孔,係亦可在前述單位基材之前述第2面側而被密封。於此情況,前述塗布液,係在被作了密封的空間內而從前述單位基材之前述第1面側被作塗布。又,在前述硬化工程中,前述孔用補強部,係以將前述單位基材之前述貫通孔作閉塞的方式而被形成。又,前述覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,係在前述硬化工程之後,更進而具備有在前述孔用補強部處形成貫通孔之 樹脂材料加工工程。 Before the manufacturing method of the cover glass caused by the present invention In the coating process, the through-holes of the unit substrate may be sealed on the second surface side of the unit substrate. In this case, the coating liquid is applied from the first surface side of the unit substrate in a sealed space. Further, in the above-described hardening process, the hole reinforcing portion is formed to block the through hole of the unit base material. Further, in the method for producing a cover glass, after the hardening process, a through hole is formed in the hole reinforcing portion. Resin material processing engineering.

在由本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法中, 係亦可構成為:於前述準備工程中,在前述單位基材之前述第1面上,係設置有被形成了與前述單位基材之前述貫通孔相通連的孔之第1保護膜,前述第1保護膜之前述孔的壁面,係位置在相較於前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面而更靠向前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的中心側。 In the method of manufacturing the cover glass caused by the present invention, The first protective film may be formed on the first surface of the unit substrate, wherein the first protective film is formed with a hole that is continuous with the through hole of the unit substrate. The wall surface of the hole of the first protective film is located closer to the center side of the through hole of the unit substrate than the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate.

由本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法的前述 準備工程,係亦可包含有:保護膜形成工程,係在前述單位基材之前述第1面上,設置被形成有前述孔之前述第1保護膜;和蝕刻工程,係藉由將前述第1保護膜作為抗蝕層而對於前述單位基材進行濕蝕刻,來形成前述貫通孔。 The foregoing method for manufacturing a cover glass by the present invention The preparation process may include: a protective film forming process in which the first protective film on which the hole is formed is provided on the first surface of the unit substrate; and an etching process is performed by the The protective film is wet-etched on the unit substrate as a resist layer to form the through hole.

於此情況,係亦可構成為:在前述保護膜形成工程中,係在前述單位基材之前述第2面上,更進而設置於與前述第1保護膜之前述孔相對應的位置處被形成有孔之第2保護膜,在前述蝕刻工程中,前述單位基材,係將前述第1保護膜和前述第2保護膜作為抗蝕層,而被從前述第1面側以及前述第2面側起進行濕蝕刻,在前述塗布工程中,前述單位基材之前述貫通孔,係藉由被配置在前述第2保護膜上之密封構件而被作密封。 In this case, in the protective film forming process, the second surface of the unit substrate may be further provided at a position corresponding to the hole of the first protective film. In the etching process, the unit substrate is formed of the first protective film and the second protective film as a resist layer from the first surface side and the second surface. The wet etching is performed on the surface side, and in the coating process, the through-holes of the unit substrate are sealed by a sealing member disposed on the second protective film.

或者是,係亦可構成為:在前述準備工程中,於前述單位基材之前述第2面上,係被設置有將前述單位基材之前述貫通孔作密封的第2保護膜或者是密封構件,在前述蝕刻工程中,前述單位基材,係將前述第1保護膜作為抗 蝕層,而被從前述第1面側起進行濕蝕刻。 Alternatively, in the preparation process, the second surface of the unit substrate may be provided with a second protective film or a seal for sealing the through hole of the unit substrate. In the above etching process, the unit substrate is made of the first protective film. The etched layer is wet etched from the first surface side.

由本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,係亦 可更進而具備有:要素部形成工程,係在前述單位基材之前述第1面側,形成包含有裝飾部或者是觸控面板感測部之至少其中一者的要素部之至少一部分。 The method for manufacturing the cover glass caused by the present invention is also Further, the element portion forming process may be performed to form at least a part of the element portion including at least one of the decorative portion or the touch panel sensing portion on the first surface side of the unit substrate.

在由本發明所致之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法中, 係亦可構成為:前述要素部形成工程,係先於前述保護膜形成工程之前而被實施。 In the method of manufacturing the cover glass caused by the present invention, Alternatively, the element portion forming process may be performed before the protective film forming process.

若依據本發明,則係可提供一種具備有補強部之覆蓋玻璃,該補強部,係具有適當之硬度以及韌性。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a cover glass having a reinforcing portion having appropriate hardness and toughness.

10‧‧‧附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置 10‧‧‧ Display device with cover glass

15‧‧‧顯示裝置 15‧‧‧ display device

20‧‧‧覆蓋玻璃 20‧‧‧ Covering glass

22‧‧‧單位基材 22‧‧‧unit substrate

23‧‧‧覆蓋玻璃之貫通孔 23‧‧‧through glass through hole

23c‧‧‧壁面 23c‧‧‧ wall

24a‧‧‧壓縮應力層 24a‧‧‧Compressive stress layer

24b‧‧‧拉張應力層 24b‧‧‧ tensile stress layer

25‧‧‧單位基材之貫通孔 25‧‧‧through hole for unit substrate

25c‧‧‧壁面 25c‧‧‧ wall

26‧‧‧補強部(側面用補強部) 26‧‧‧Reinforcement Department (side reinforcement)

27‧‧‧塗布液 27‧‧‧ Coating solution

28‧‧‧孔用補強部 28‧‧‧Reinforcement Department

30‧‧‧基材 30‧‧‧Substrate

40‧‧‧觸控面板感測部 40‧‧‧Touch Panel Sensing Department

60‧‧‧第1裝飾部 60‧‧‧1st decoration department

62‧‧‧第2裝飾部 62‧‧‧2nd Decoration Department

81‧‧‧第1保護膜 81‧‧‧1st protective film

82‧‧‧第2保護膜 82‧‧‧2nd protective film

[圖1]圖1,係為對於本發明之第1實施形態中的附覆蓋玻璃顯示裝置作展示之展開圖。 Fig. 1 is a development view showing a cover glass display device according to a first embodiment of the present invention.

[圖2]圖2,係為對於被設置在圖1之覆蓋玻璃處的觸控面板感測部作展示之平面圖。 FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a touch panel sensing portion provided at the cover glass of FIG. 1. FIG.

[圖3]圖3,係為圖2之覆蓋玻璃的沿著III線之剖面圖。 Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line III of the cover glass of Fig. 2.

[圖4]圖4,係為圖2之覆蓋玻璃的沿著IV線之剖面圖。 Fig. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line IV of the cover glass of Fig. 2.

[圖5]圖5,係為將圖3之覆蓋玻璃的側面作擴大展 示之剖面圖。 [Fig. 5] Fig. 5 is an enlarged view of the side of the cover glass of Fig. 3. Show the profile.

[圖6A]圖6A,係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 6A] Fig. 6A is a view showing a part of a process for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass.

[圖6B]圖6B之(a)、(b),係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 6B] Fig. 6B (a) and (b) show a part of a project for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass. Figure.

[圖6C]圖6C,係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 6C] FIG. 6C is a view showing a part of a process for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass.

[圖6D]圖6D(a)、(b),係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 6D] Fig. 6D(a) and (b) are diagrams showing a part of a project for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass. .

[圖6E]圖6E(a)、(b),係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 6E] Fig. 6E (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a part of a project for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass. .

[圖7A]圖7A,係為對於用以藉由在單位層積體之單位基材的側面設置樹脂一事來得到對於側面作了補強的覆蓋玻璃之工程之一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 7A] Fig. 7A is a view showing a part of a work for obtaining a cover glass which is reinforced with a side surface by providing a resin on a side surface of a unit substrate of a unit laminate.

[圖7B]圖7B,係為對於用以藉由在單位層積體之單位基材的側面設置樹脂一事來得到對於側面作了補強的覆蓋玻璃之工程之一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 7B] Fig. 7B is a view showing a part of an engineering for obtaining a cover glass which is reinforced by a side surface by providing a resin on a side surface of a unit substrate of a unit laminate.

[圖7C]圖7C,係為對於用以藉由在單位層積體之單位基材的側面設置樹脂一事來得到對於側面作了補強的覆 蓋玻璃之工程之一部分作展示之圖。 [ Fig. 7C] Fig. 7C is a view showing a reinforced surface for the purpose of providing a resin on the side surface of a unit substrate of a unit laminate. Part of the project to cover the glass is shown in the map.

[圖7D]圖7D,係為對於用以藉由在單位層積體之單位基材的側面設置樹脂一事來得到對於側面作了補強的覆蓋玻璃之工程之一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 7D] Fig. 7D is a view showing a part of an engineering for obtaining a cover glass which is reinforced with a side surface by providing a resin on a side surface of a unit substrate of a unit laminate.

[圖8]圖8,係為對於第1實施形態之第1變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a first modification of the first embodiment.

[圖9]圖9,係為對於第1實施形態之第2變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 9 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a second modification of the first embodiment.

[圖10]圖10,係為對於第1實施形態之第3變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a third modification of the first embodiment.

[圖11]圖11,係為對於第1實施形態之第4變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fourth modification of the first embodiment.

[圖12]圖12,係為對於第1實施形態之第5變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fifth modification of the first embodiment.

[圖13]圖13,係為對於第1實施形態之第6變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 13 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a sixth modification of the first embodiment.

[圖14]圖14,係為對於在被形成於單位基材處之貫通孔的壁面上形成有補強部的例子作展示之圖。 Fig. 14 is a view showing an example in which a reinforcing portion is formed on a wall surface of a through hole formed in a unit base material.

[圖15]圖15,係為對於在圖14中所示之貫通孔的壁面a上形成補強部26的工程作展示之圖。 Fig. 15 is a view showing the construction of the reinforcing portion 26 on the wall surface a of the through hole shown in Fig. 14.

[圖16]圖16,係為對於由第2實施形態所致之覆蓋玻璃作展示之平面圖。 Fig. 16 is a plan view showing a cover glass according to a second embodiment.

[圖17]圖17,係為圖16之覆蓋玻璃的沿著XVII線之剖面圖。 Fig. 17 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XVII of the cover glass of Fig. 16.

[圖18]圖18,係為將圖17之覆蓋玻璃的貫通孔作擴大展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 18 is a cross-sectional view showing the through hole of the cover glass of Fig. 17 in an enlarged manner.

[圖19A]圖19A,係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 19A] Fig. 19A is a view showing a part of a process for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass.

[圖19B]圖19B,係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 19B] FIG. 19B is a view showing a part of a process for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass.

[圖19C]圖19C(a)、(b),係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 19C] FIGS. 19C(a) and (b) are diagrams showing a part of a process for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass. .

[圖19D]圖19D(a)、(b)、(c),係為對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材來形成具有單位基材以及保護膜之單位層積體的工程之一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 19D] Fig. 19D (a), (b), and (c) are a part of a process for forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of a large tempered glass. A picture of the show.

[圖20A]圖20A,係為對於對覆蓋玻璃的貫通孔進行補強之工程的一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 20A] Fig. 20A is a view showing a part of a process for reinforcing a through hole covering a glass.

[圖20B]圖20B,係為對於對覆蓋玻璃的貫通孔進行補強之工程的一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 20B] Fig. 20B is a view showing a part of an engineering for reinforcing a through hole of a cover glass.

[圖20C]圖20C,係為對於對覆蓋玻璃的貫通孔進行補強之工程的一部分作展示之圖。 20C] Fig. 20C is a view showing a part of an engineering for reinforcing a through hole of a cover glass.

[圖20D]圖20D,係為對於對覆蓋玻璃的貫通孔進行補強之工程的一部分作展示之圖。 [Fig. 20D] Fig. 20D is a view showing a part of an engineering for reinforcing a through hole of a cover glass.

[圖21A]圖21A,係為對於第2實施形態之第1變形例中的第1保護膜作展示之剖面圖。 [ Fig. 21A] Fig. 21A is a cross-sectional view showing a first protective film in a first modification of the second embodiment.

[圖21B]圖21B,係為對於在第2實施形態之第1變形例中,藉由將第2保護膜作為抗蝕層而對於基材進行蝕刻一事所得到的單位層積體作展示之剖面圖。 [Fig. 21B] Fig. 21B shows a unit laminate obtained by etching a substrate with a second protective film as a resist layer in the first modification of the second embodiment. Sectional view.

[圖22A]圖22A,係為對於在第2實施形態之第1變形例中,在被第2保護膜以及單位基材之貫通孔所包圍的空間內而塗布塗布液之工程作展示之圖。 [Fig. 22A] Fig. 22A is a diagram showing an engineering display of applying a coating liquid in a space surrounded by a through hole of a second protective film and a unit substrate in a first modification of the second embodiment. .

[圖22B]圖22B,係為對於在第2實施形態之第1變形例中,在孔用補強部處形成貫通孔之工程作展示之圖。 [Fig. 22B] Fig. 22B is a view showing an engineering construction in which a through hole is formed in a hole reinforcing portion in the first modification of the second embodiment.

[圖22C]圖22C,係為對於第2實施形態之第1變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 [ Fig. 22C] Fig. 22C is a cross-sectional view showing the cover glass in the first modification of the second embodiment.

[圖23A]圖23A,係為對於第2實施形態之第2變形例中的單位基材作展示之剖面圖。 [ Fig. 23A] Fig. 23A is a cross-sectional view showing a unit substrate in a second modification of the second embodiment.

[圖23B]圖23B,係為對於第2實施形態之第2變形例中的單位層積體作展示之剖面圖。 [ Fig. 23B] Fig. 23B is a cross-sectional view showing a unit laminate in a second modification of the second embodiment.

[圖24A]圖24A,係為對於在第2實施形態之第2變形例中,在被第2保護膜以及單位基材之貫通孔所包圍的空間內而塗布塗布液之工程作展示之圖。 [Fig. 24A] Fig. 24A is a diagram showing an engineering display of applying a coating liquid in a space surrounded by a through hole of a second protective film and a unit substrate in a second modification of the second embodiment. .

[圖24B]圖24B,係為對於第2實施形態之第2變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 24B is a cross-sectional view showing the cover glass in the second modification of the second embodiment.

[圖25A]圖25A,係為對於第2實施形態之第3變形例中的單位層積體作展示之剖面圖。 [ Fig. 25A] Fig. 25A is a cross-sectional view showing a unit laminate in a third modification of the second embodiment.

[圖25B]圖25B,係為對於在第2實施形態之第3變形例中,在被第2保護膜以及單位基材之貫通孔所包圍的空間內而塗布塗布液之工程作展示之圖。 [Fig. 25B] Fig. 25B is a view showing an engineering display of applying a coating liquid in a space surrounded by a through hole of a second protective film and a unit substrate in a third modification of the second embodiment. .

[圖25C]圖25C,係為對於第2實施形態之第3變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 [ Fig. 25C] Fig. 25C is a cross-sectional view showing the cover glass in the third modification of the second embodiment.

[圖26]圖26,係為對於第2實施形態之第4變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 26 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fourth modification of the second embodiment.

[圖27]圖27,係為對於第2實施形態之第5變形例中的覆蓋玻璃作展示之剖面圖。 Fig. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fifth modification of the second embodiment.

[圖28]圖28,係為對於第2實施形態之第6變形例中的覆蓋玻璃之其中一例作展示之剖面圖。 [ Fig. 28] Fig. 28 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a cover glass in a sixth modification of the second embodiment.

[圖29]圖29,係為對於第2實施形態之第6變形例中的覆蓋玻璃之另外一例作展示之剖面圖。 [ Fig. 29] Fig. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing another example of the cover glass in the sixth modification of the second embodiment.

[圖30]圖30,係為對於在第2實施形態之第7變形例中的被塗布於覆蓋玻璃之貫通孔之壁面上的塗布液之其中一例作展示之圖。 [Fig. 30] Fig. 30 is a view showing an example of a coating liquid applied to a wall surface of a through hole covering a glass in a seventh modification of the second embodiment.

[圖31]圖31,係為對於在第2實施形態之第7變形例中的被塗布於覆蓋玻璃之貫通孔之壁面上的塗布液之另外一例作展示之圖。 [Fig. 31] Fig. 31 is a view showing another example of the coating liquid applied to the wall surface of the through hole covering the glass in the seventh modification of the second embodiment.

[圖32]圖32,係為對於第2實施形態之第8變形例中的被設置有觸控面板感測部之覆蓋玻璃之其中一例作展示之平面圖。 FIG. 32 is a plan view showing an example of a cover glass provided with a touch panel sensing unit in an eighth modification of the second embodiment.

[圖33]圖33,係為圖32之覆蓋玻璃的沿著XXXIII線之剖面圖。 Fig. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXXIII of the cover glass of Fig. 32.

[圖34]圖34,係為圖32之覆蓋玻璃的沿著XXXIV線之剖面圖。 Fig. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXXIV of the cover glass of Fig. 32.

[圖35]圖35,係為對於第2實施形態之第8變形例 中的被設置有觸控面板感測部之覆蓋玻璃之另外一例作展示之剖面圖。 35 is a modification of the eighth embodiment of the second embodiment. Another cross-sectional view of the cover glass provided with the touch panel sensing portion is shown.

[圖36]圖36(a)~(d),係為對於在實施例2中而對樹脂之印刷適合性作評價的方法作展示之圖。 36(a) to 36(d) are diagrams showing a method of evaluating the printing suitability of a resin in Example 2.

[圖37]圖37,係為對於在實施例3中而對樹脂之耐衝擊性作評價的方法作展示之圖。 Fig. 37 is a view showing a method for evaluating the impact resistance of a resin in Example 3.

第1實施形態 First embodiment

以下,參考圖1~圖7D,針對本發明之第1實施形態作說明。另外,在本說明書所附錄的圖面中,係為了圖示上之方便以及易於理解,而適宜地對於圖面與實物之縮尺以及縱橫的尺寸比例等作變更並作了誇張展示。 Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 7D. In addition, in the drawings attached to the present specification, for the sake of convenience and ease of understanding in the drawings, the scales of the drawings and the objects, and the ratio of the dimensions of the vertical and horizontal dimensions are appropriately changed and exaggerated.

(附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置) (with display device covering the glass)

首先,參考圖1,針對附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置10作說明。如圖1中所示一般,附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置10,係藉由將顯示裝置15和覆蓋玻璃20作組合,而構成之。圖示之顯示裝置15,係構成為平面面板顯示器。顯示裝置15,係具備有:具有顯示面16a之顯示面板16、和被與顯示面板16作了連接的顯示控制部(未圖示)。顯示面板16,係包含有能夠顯示影像之主動區域A1、和以包圍主動區域A1的方式而被配置在主動區域A1之外側的 非主動區域(亦稱作框緣區域)A2。顯示控制部,係對關連於所應顯示之影像的資訊進行處理,並基於影像資訊而驅動顯示面板16。顯示面板16,係基於顯示控制部之控制訊號,來在顯示面16a上顯示特定之影像。亦即是,顯示裝置15,係擔當將文字或圖等的資訊作為影像來輸出的身為輸出裝置之任務。 First, referring to Fig. 1, a description will be given of a display device 10 with a cover glass. As shown in Fig. 1, generally, a display device 10 with a cover glass is constructed by combining a display device 15 and a cover glass 20. The display device 15 shown is a flat panel display. The display device 15 includes a display panel 16 having a display surface 16a and a display control unit (not shown) connected to the display panel 16. The display panel 16 includes an active area A1 capable of displaying an image, and is disposed on the outer side of the active area A1 in such a manner as to surround the active area A1. Inactive area (also known as frame area) A2. The display control unit processes the information related to the image to be displayed, and drives the display panel 16 based on the image information. The display panel 16 displays a specific image on the display surface 16a based on the control signal of the display control unit. In other words, the display device 15 serves as an output device for outputting information such as characters or figures as images.

如圖1中所示一般,覆蓋玻璃20,係在顯示 裝置15之觀察者側處而被配置在顯示面板16之顯示面16a上。此覆蓋玻璃20,例如係經由接著層(未圖示)而被接著於顯示裝置15之顯示面16a上。於圖1中,覆蓋玻璃20之顯示裝置側之面(第1面),係標示為元件符號20a,觀察者側之面(第2面),係標示為元件符號20b。 As shown in Figure 1, the cover glass 20 is generally displayed. The display side of the device 15 is disposed on the display surface 16a of the display panel 16. The cover glass 20 is attached to the display surface 16a of the display device 15 via, for example, an adhesive layer (not shown). In Fig. 1, the surface (first surface) of the cover glass 20 on the display device side is denoted by the component symbol 20a, and the surface of the viewer side (the second surface) is denoted by the component symbol 20b.

另外,在本實施形態中,覆蓋玻璃20,係構 成為除了保護顯示裝置15之功能以外亦提供有觸控面板之功能者。具體而言,在覆蓋玻璃20之顯示裝置15側的第1面20a上,係被設置有觸控面板感測部40,該觸控面板感測部40,係包含有用以檢測出外部導體之接近或接觸的感測電極。又,在覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a的非主動區域Aa2處,係更進而設置有用以呈現所期望之顏色的第1裝飾部60。 In addition, in the present embodiment, the cover glass 20, the structure In addition to the function of protecting the display device 15, the function of the touch panel is also provided. Specifically, the first surface 20a on the display device 15 side of the cover glass 20 is provided with a touch panel sensing portion 40, and the touch panel sensing portion 40 includes a function for detecting an external conductor. Sensing electrodes that are close to or in contact. Further, at the inactive area Aa2 of the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20, a first decorative portion 60 for providing a desired color is further provided.

(觸控面板感測器) (touch panel sensor)

接著,參考圖2,針對被設置在覆蓋玻璃20之第1 面20a處的觸控面板感測部40作說明。圖2,係為對於從第1面20a側來對於覆蓋玻璃20作了觀察的情況作展示之平面圖。另外,在圖2中,為了方便說明,係將第1裝飾部60省略。 Next, referring to FIG. 2, for the first set on the cover glass 20 The touch panel sensing unit 40 at the surface 20a will be described. Fig. 2 is a plan view showing a case where the cover glass 20 is observed from the side of the first surface 20a. In addition, in FIG. 2, for convenience of description, the 1st decorative part 60 is abbreviate|omitted.

如圖2中所示一般,覆蓋玻璃20之第1面 20a,係對應於顯示面板16之主動區域A1以及非主動區域A2,而被區劃為與能夠檢測出觸碰位置之區域相對應的主動區域Aa1、和位置在主動區域Aa1之周邊的非主動區域Aa2。又,觸控面板感測部40,係具備有:被配置在主動區域Aa1處之複數之感測電極41、42,和被與所對應之感測電極41、42作連接並且被配置在覆蓋玻璃20之非主動區域Aa2處的複數之導出配線43,以及被與所對應之導出配線43作連接的複數之端子部44。 As shown in FIG. 2, the first side of the cover glass 20 is generally covered. 20a corresponds to the active area A1 and the inactive area A2 of the display panel 16, and is divided into an active area Aa1 corresponding to the area where the touch position can be detected, and an inactive area positioned around the active area Aa1. Aa2. Further, the touch panel sensing unit 40 is provided with a plurality of sensing electrodes 41 and 42 disposed at the active area Aa1, and is connected to the corresponding sensing electrodes 41 and 42 and disposed in the overlay. The plurality of lead wires 43 at the inactive area Aa2 of the glass 20 and the plurality of terminal portions 44 connected to the corresponding lead wires 43 are provided.

感測電極41、42,係如圖2中所示一般,具 備有沿著第1方向D1而延伸之複數之第1感測電極41、和沿著與第1方向D1相正交之第2方向D2而延伸的複數之第2感測電極42。各感測電極41、42,係亦可分別具備有以直線狀而延伸之線部41a、42a,和從線部41a、42a而膨出的膨出部41b、42b。 The sensing electrodes 41, 42 are generally as shown in FIG. A plurality of first sensing electrodes 41 extending along the first direction D1 and a plurality of second sensing electrodes 42 extending along the second direction D2 orthogonal to the first direction D1 are provided. Each of the sensing electrodes 41 and 42 may be provided with linear portions 41a and 42a extending in a straight line, and bulging portions 41b and 42b bulging from the line portions 41a and 42a, respectively.

導出配線43,係為為了將藉由所對應之感測 電極41、42而檢測出的訊號一直傳導至端子部44處而設置在非主動區域Aa2處者。藉由導出配線43而一直被傳導至端子部44處之訊號,係經由被安裝於端子部44處的可撓性基板(未圖示)等而被傳導至檢測控制部處。 Exporting the wiring 43 in order to be sensed by the corresponding The signals detected by the electrodes 41, 42 are always conducted to the terminal portion 44 and are disposed at the inactive area Aa2. The signal that is always transmitted to the terminal portion 44 by the lead wire 43 is transmitted to the detection control portion via a flexible substrate (not shown) or the like attached to the terminal portion 44.

(覆蓋玻璃、觸控面板感測器以及裝飾部之層構成) (covering glass, touch panel sensor, and decorative layer)

接著,參考圖3以及圖4,針對覆蓋玻璃20和被設置在覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a處的觸控面板感測部40以及第1裝飾部60之層構成作說明。圖3以及圖4,係分別為圖2中所示之覆蓋玻璃20的沿著線III以及線IV之剖面圖。 Next, a layer configuration of the cover glass 20 and the touch panel sensing unit 40 and the first decorative portion 60 provided on the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4 . 3 and 4 are cross-sectional views along line III and line IV of the cover glass 20 shown in Fig. 2, respectively.

首先,針對被配置在覆蓋玻璃20的主動區域 Aa1處之構成要素的層構成作說明。如圖3以及圖4中所示一般,觸控面板感測部40之第1線部41a、第1膨出部41b以及第2膨出部42b,係亦可為被形成於同一平面上者。於此情況,係藉由對於由氧化銦錫(ITO)等之透明導電性材料所成的透明導電層51進行圖案化,而能夠同時形成第1線部41a、第1膨出部41b以及第2膨出部42b。第1線部41a以及第2線部42a,係以當從覆蓋玻璃20之法線方向來作觀察時會相互作部分性重疊的方式而被形成,在第1線部41a和第2線部42a之間,係中介存在有絕緣層47。 First, for the active area that is disposed in the cover glass 20 The layer constitution of the constituent elements at Aa1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the first line portion 41a, the first bulging portion 41b, and the second bulging portion 42b of the touch panel sensing unit 40 may be formed on the same plane. . In this case, by patterning the transparent conductive layer 51 made of a transparent conductive material such as indium tin oxide (ITO), the first line portion 41a, the first bulging portion 41b, and the first portion can be simultaneously formed. 2 bulging portion 42b. The first line portion 41a and the second line portion 42a are formed so as to partially overlap each other when viewed from the normal direction of the cover glass 20, and are formed in the first line portion 41a and the second line portion. Between 42a, there is an insulating layer 47 interposed.

接著,針對被配置在覆蓋玻璃20的非主動區 域Aa2處之構成要素的層構成作說明。如圖3以及圖4中所示一般,在非主動區域Aa2處,第1裝飾部60,係以位置在相較於上述之導出配線43而更靠觀察者側的方式而被作配置。於此情況,第1裝飾部60,係成為從觀察者側起隔著覆蓋玻璃20而被作視覺辨認。亦即是,在附 覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置10中,非主動區域Aa2之外觀,係成為被第1裝飾部60及其周邊之構成要素所決定。 Next, for the inactive area that is disposed in the cover glass 20 The layer configuration of the constituent elements at the domain Aa2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, in the inactive area Aa2, the first decorative portion 60 is disposed such that the position is closer to the observer than the above-described lead-out wiring 43. In this case, the first decorative portion 60 is visually recognized from the observer side via the cover glass 20. That is, in the attached In the display device 10 for covering glass, the appearance of the inactive area Aa2 is determined by the constituent elements of the first decorative portion 60 and its surroundings.

第1裝飾部60之顏色,係因應於對附覆蓋玻 璃之顯示裝置10所要求的設計感而被作選擇。例如,作為第1裝飾部60的顏色之例,係可列舉出黑色、白色、水藍色、桃紅色、綠色等。構成第1裝飾部60之材料,雖係因應於所選擇之顏色來作決定,但是,例如當要求其為白色的情況時,第1裝飾部60,係包含有由樹脂材料所成之接合材、和被分散於接合材內之氧化鈦等的著色顏料。作為接合材,例如,係可適宜使用丙烯酸樹脂、環氧樹脂、聚胺酯樹脂、聚醯胺樹脂等的樹脂,或者是此些之樹脂的混合物。 The color of the first decorative part 60 is corresponding to the cover glass The design sense required for the glass display device 10 is selected. For example, examples of the color of the first decorative portion 60 include black, white, aqua blue, pink, green, and the like. The material constituting the first decorative portion 60 is determined according to the selected color. However, for example, when it is required to be white, the first decorative portion 60 includes a bonding material made of a resin material. And a coloring pigment such as titanium oxide dispersed in the bonding material. As the bonding material, for example, a resin such as an acrylic resin, an epoxy resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin, or the like, or a mixture of such resins can be suitably used.

另外,在覆蓋玻璃20之製造工程中,當先在 單位基材22或者是後述之基材30上設置第1裝飾部60,接著在單位基材22之側面22c處設置補強部26的情況時,如同圖3以及圖4中所示一般,第1裝飾部60會成為無法一直延展至覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c處、亦即是成為無法一直延展至補強部26之側面26c處。因此,由第1裝飾部60所得到的設計上之效果,會成為無法涵蓋到覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c處、例如成為無法涵蓋到補強部26之部分處。考慮到此點,係亦可如圖3以及圖4中所示一般,在單位基材22之第1面22a側或者是補強部26之第1面26a側的第1裝飾部60之外側之位置處,設置第2裝飾部62。第2裝飾部62,係為以會呈現特定之 顏色的方式所構成者。藉由更進而設置此種第2裝飾部62,係可將能夠呈現所期望之顏色的非主動區域Aa2之範圍更朝向外側擴張,而能夠謀求像是對於從外周部而來之漏光作防止等之設計性的提升。較理想,第2裝飾部62,係以當沿著覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a之法線方向來作觀察的情況時會與補強部26相互重疊的方式,而被構成。更理想,第2裝飾部62,係以當沿著覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a之法線方向來作觀察的情況時會一直到達覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c處的方式,而被構成。 In addition, in the manufacturing process of the cover glass 20, When the first decorative portion 60 is provided on the unit base material 22 or the base material 30 to be described later, and then the reinforcing portion 26 is provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. The decorative portion 60 may not be able to extend all the way to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20, that is, it may not extend to the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26. Therefore, the design effect obtained by the first decorative portion 60 is not covered by the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20, and is, for example, a portion that cannot be covered by the reinforcing portion 26. In consideration of this point, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the first decorative portion 60 on the side of the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 or the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 may be used. At the position, the second decorative portion 62 is provided. The second decorative portion 62 is intended to present a specific The way the color is formed. By further providing such a second decorative portion 62, the range of the inactive area Aa2 capable of exhibiting a desired color can be further expanded outward, and the image can be prevented from leaking light from the outer peripheral portion. Design improvement. Preferably, the second decorative portion 62 is configured to overlap the reinforcing portion 26 when viewed along the normal direction of the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20. More preferably, the second decorative portion 62 is configured to reach the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 when viewed along the normal direction of the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20.

第2裝飾部62所呈現之顏色,係並未特別限 定,而因應於所要求的設計上之效果來適宜作設定。例如,第2裝飾部62,係能夠以與第1裝飾部60呈現相同顏色的方式來藉由與第1裝飾部60相同之材料而構成,或者是,亦能夠以呈現與第1裝飾部60相異之顏色的方式來構成之。作為設置第2裝飾部62之方法,係可採用各種之公知的方法,但是,例如,係採用在形成補強部26之後,將含有構成第2裝飾部62之材料的塗布液藉由網版印刷法等之印刷法來塗布在補強部26之第1面26a上等的方法。在使用印刷法的情況時,作為用以構成塗布液之溶媒,例如係可使用醚類,酮類,酯類,醇類,多元醇類,芳香族烴類等。又,塗布液之表面張力,例如係調整在20~40mN/m的範圍內。 The color of the second decorative portion 62 is not particularly limited. It is appropriate to set it according to the desired design effect. For example, the second decorative portion 62 can be configured by the same material as the first decorative portion 60 so as to exhibit the same color as the first decorative portion 60, or can be presented and the first decorative portion 60. The way different colors are formed. As a method of providing the second decorative portion 62, various known methods can be employed. For example, after the reinforcing portion 26 is formed, the coating liquid containing the material constituting the second decorative portion 62 is screen-printed. A method in which the printing method such as the method is applied to the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 or the like. In the case of using a printing method, as the solvent for constituting the coating liquid, for example, ethers, ketones, esters, alcohols, polyhydric alcohols, aromatic hydrocarbons and the like can be used. Further, the surface tension of the coating liquid is adjusted, for example, in the range of 20 to 40 mN/m.

接著,針對覆蓋玻璃20之構成作說明。如同 圖3以及圖4中所示一般,覆蓋玻璃20,係具備有單位 基材22以及補強部26。單位基材22,係包含有:顯示裝置側之第1面22a、和與第1面22a相反側之第2面22b、以及在第1面22a和第2面22b之間而延展的側面22c。又,補強部26,係被設置在單位基材22之側面22c上。 Next, the configuration of the cover glass 20 will be described. as As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the cover glass 20 is generally provided with a unit. The base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26. The unit base material 22 includes a first surface 22a on the display device side, a second surface 22b on the opposite side to the first surface 22a, and a side surface 22c extending between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b. . Further, the reinforcing portion 26 is provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22.

如同後述一般,單位基材22,係為藉由將由 大型之強化玻璃所成的基材30分割並個片化所得到者。 此單位基材22,係如圖5中所示一般,包含有被形成於第1面22a以及第2面22b上之壓縮應力層24a、和位置在第1面22a側之壓縮應力層24a和第2面22b側之壓縮應力層24a之間的拉張應力層24b。所謂壓縮應力層24a,係指產生有壓縮應力之層,所謂拉張應力層24b,係為產生有拉張應力之層。作為用以產生此些之壓縮應力層24a以及拉張應力層24b的方法,係周知有物理性強化(風冷強化)和化學性強化。例如,在化學性強化中,係實施有下述一般之化學性的處理:亦即是,於形變點以下之溫度,將在玻璃中所包含的鹼性離子交換為離子半徑更大之其他的鹼性離子。藉由此,係能夠在離子被作了交換的表層附近而使壓縮應力產生。藉由形成壓縮應力層24a,就算是當對於第1面22a或第2面22b施加有某種之衝擊並起因於此而在第1面22a或第2面22b上形成了碎裂等之傷痕的情況時,亦能夠防止傷痕的擴大。因此,單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b,係對於衝擊而具有高耐性。作為構成單位基材22之材料,例如係可 使用鋁矽酸鹽玻璃。壓縮應力層24a之厚度,一般而言係成為10~100μm之範圍內。 As will be described later, the unit substrate 22 is A substrate made of a large tempered glass is divided into 30 pieces and obtained. The unit base material 22 includes a compressive stress layer 24a formed on the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b, and a compressive stress layer 24a positioned on the first surface 22a side, as shown in FIG. The tensile stress layer 24b between the compressive stress layers 24a on the second surface 22b side. The compressive stress layer 24a refers to a layer in which compressive stress is generated, and the tensile stress layer 24b is a layer in which tensile stress is generated. As a method for producing such a compressive stress layer 24a and a tensile stress layer 24b, physical strengthening (air cooling strengthening) and chemical strengthening are known. For example, in chemical strengthening, the following general chemical treatment is carried out: that is, the basic ions contained in the glass are exchanged to have a larger ionic radius at a temperature lower than the deformation point. Alkaline ions. Thereby, compressive stress can be generated in the vicinity of the surface layer where ions are exchanged. By forming the compressive stress layer 24a, even if a certain impact is applied to the first surface 22a or the second surface 22b, a flaw such as a chipping is formed on the first surface 22a or the second surface 22b. In the case of the situation, it is also possible to prevent the spread of the scar. Therefore, the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 have high resistance to impact. As a material constituting the unit substrate 22, for example, Use aluminosilicate glass. The thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is generally in the range of 10 to 100 μm.

另一方面,如圖5中所示一般,單位基材22 之拉張應力層24b,係一直到達至單位基材22之側面22c處。亦即是,在單位基材22之側面22c處,拉張應力層24b係露出。因此,單位基材22之側面22c,相較於單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b,對於碎裂等之損傷的耐性係變得較弱。上述之補強部26,係為為了對於此種單位基材22之側面22c作保護所設置者。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, the unit substrate 22 is generally used. The tensile stress layer 24b reaches up to the side 22c of the unit substrate 22. That is, at the side surface 22c of the unit substrate 22, the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed. Therefore, the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is less resistant to damage such as chipping than the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22. The reinforcing portion 26 described above is provided for protecting the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22.

作為構成補強部26之材料,例如,係使用藉 由加熱或紫外線照射等而進行聚合反應並會起因於此而硬化的硬化性樹脂。於此情況,於硬化前之成形時,補強部26係具有所期望的流動性,而,在硬化後,補強部26係成為具有所期望之硬度和強度。藉由此,係能夠同時達成成形性和硬度以及強度上的目標。 As a material constituting the reinforcing portion 26, for example, it is used A curable resin which is polymerized by heating or ultraviolet irradiation or the like and hardens due to this. In this case, the reinforcing portion 26 has a desired fluidity during molding before curing, and the reinforcing portion 26 has a desired hardness and strength after curing. By this, it is possible to simultaneously achieve the goals of formability, hardness, and strength.

另外,在本實施形態中,補強部26,係為相 對於大氣等之外部環境而至少作部分性的露出者。故而,補強部26之硬化時的聚合反應,係成為在補強部26會對於大氣等之外部環境而有所露出的環境下所進行者。因此,若是使用如同丙烯酸系樹脂一般之具有高反應性的樹脂材料,則聚合反應會被氧所阻礙,其結果,可以推測到,係無法充分地進行聚合反應,故而,係無法得到具有充分的硬度之補強部26。 Further, in the present embodiment, the reinforcing portion 26 is a phase It is at least partially exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere. Therefore, the polymerization reaction at the time of curing of the reinforcing portion 26 is performed in an environment where the reinforcing portion 26 is exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere. Therefore, when a resin material having high reactivity as in the case of an acrylic resin is used, the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, it is presumed that the polymerization reaction cannot be sufficiently performed, and therefore, it is not possible to obtain sufficient The reinforcing portion 26 of hardness.

又,若是使用像是環氧系樹脂一般之具有過度之高硬 度的樹脂材料,則補強部26會變脆,其結果,可以推測到,會成為在補強部26處頻繁地出現缺陷等的情形。亦即是,可以推測到,補強部26之韌性會變低。 Also, if it is used like an epoxy resin, it has an excessively high hardness. When the resin material is used, the reinforcing portion 26 becomes brittle, and as a result, it is estimated that defects or the like frequently occur in the reinforcing portion 26. That is, it can be inferred that the toughness of the reinforcing portion 26 is lowered.

又,如同上述一般,當在單位基材22之側面22c處設置了補強部26之後,於補強部26上形成第2裝飾部62的情況時,第2裝飾部62,係藉由網版印刷法等之印刷法來形成。因此,為了將第2裝飾部62安定地保持在補強部26上,補強部26,係要求其具備有相對於構成第2裝飾部62之材料而具有特定之浸濕性、亦即是具備有印刷適合性。 Further, as described above, when the reinforcing portion 26 is provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, and the second decorative portion 62 is formed on the reinforcing portion 26, the second decorative portion 62 is screen-printed. A printing method such as law is formed. Therefore, in order to stably hold the second decorative portion 62 on the reinforcing portion 26, the reinforcing portion 26 is required to have a specific wettability with respect to the material constituting the second decorative portion 62, that is, it is provided Printing suitability.

在本案發明者反覆進行研究之後,其結果,如同由後述之實施例的內容而可獲得支持一般,係發現到:作為在補強部26中所包含之樹脂材料,係以聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂為理想,更理想,係為聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂。另外,所謂聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂,係指以會起因於光照射而進行聚合反應的方式所構成的聚烯-聚硫醇樹脂。以下,針對聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂之特徵作說明。聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂,係包含有烯化合物、硫醇化合物以及光聚合起始劑。此種聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂,相較於丙烯酸系光硬化性樹脂,係有著不會受到起因於氧所導致的聚合阻礙之優點。又,聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂,係具備有能夠保護單位基材22免於受到衝擊的損害並且也不會變得過脆之適當的硬度。例如,經過了適當的聚合反應後之聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化 性樹脂,係具備有D50~D75之範圍內的硬度。另外,在本案發明中,所謂「經過了適當的聚合反應」,係指在提供樹脂材料之材料製造商所推薦的條件下而實施了聚合反應。另外,相關於硬度之上述的特徵,係並不被限定於會起因於光照射而進行聚合反應的聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂,而為對於所有之包含烯化合物以及硫醇化合物之聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂而均有所符合者。另外,上述之相較於丙烯酸系光硬化性樹脂而不會受到起因於氧所導致的聚合阻礙之特徵,亦並不被限定於聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂藉由光照射而產生硬化的情況,而為對於藉由電子線照射或加熱等之其他因素來使聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂硬化的情況時亦能夠符合者。亦即是,聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,係亦可作為聚烯-聚硫醇系電子線硬化性樹脂或者是聚烯-聚硫醇系熱硬化性樹脂來構成之。 As a result of the investigation by the inventors of the present invention, as a result of obtaining the support from the contents of the examples described later, it was found that the resin material contained in the reinforcing portion 26 is a polyene-polythiol. The resin is preferably a resin, and more preferably a polyene-polythiol photocurable resin. In addition, the polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin is a polyene-polythiol resin which is formed by a polymerization reaction which is caused by light irradiation. Hereinafter, the characteristics of the polyolefin-polythiol-based photocurable resin will be described. The polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin contains an olefin compound, a thiol compound, and a photopolymerization initiator. Such a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin has an advantage that it is not hindered by polymerization due to oxygen, compared to an acrylic photocurable resin. Further, the polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin is provided with an appropriate hardness capable of protecting the unit base material 22 from impact damage and also becoming too brittle. For example, a polyene-polythiol photocuring after a suitable polymerization reaction The resin has a hardness in the range of D50 to D75. Further, in the invention of the present invention, "the appropriate polymerization reaction" means that the polymerization reaction is carried out under the conditions recommended by the material manufacturer providing the resin material. In addition, the above-mentioned characteristics relating to the hardness are not limited to the polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin which undergoes polymerization reaction due to light irradiation, but are all olefin-containing compounds and thiol compounds. The polyene-polythiol resin is compatible. Further, the above-mentioned acrylic photocurable resin is not affected by polymerization inhibition by oxygen, and is not limited to the curing of the polyolefin-polythiol resin by light irradiation. In the case of the case where the polyolefin-polythiol-based resin is cured by other factors such as electron beam irradiation or heating, it is also possible. In other words, the polyene-polythiol-based resin may be composed of a polyene-polythiol-based electron beam curable resin or a polyolefin-polythiol-based thermosetting resin.

聚硫醇系熱硬化性樹脂,例如,係包含有烯化合物、硫醇化合物以及α,α’偶氮二異丁腈(AIBN)等之熱聚合起始劑。藉由將此種聚硫醇系熱硬化性樹脂加熱至特定之熱硬化溫度,例如加熱至60~100℃以上,係能夠使聚硫醇系熱硬化性樹脂硬化。 The polythiol-based thermosetting resin includes, for example, an olefin compound, a thiol compound, and a thermal polymerization initiator such as α,α' azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN). By heating such a polythiol-based thermosetting resin to a specific heat curing temperature, for example, heating to 60 to 100 ° C or higher, the polythiol-based thermosetting resin can be cured.

在聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂等之聚烯-聚硫 醇系樹脂中的烯化合物以及硫醇化合物之構成比例,係因應於所要求之特性而適宜設定,但是,例如,聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂等之聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,係具有20~80重量%之烯化合物、和20~80重量%之硫醇化合物。 烯化合物之重量%和硫醇化合物之重量%的和,係亦可成為100。 Polyene-polysulfide in a polyene-polythiol photocurable resin The composition ratio of the olefinic compound and the thiol compound in the alcohol-based resin is appropriately set depending on the desired properties. For example, a polyene-polythiol system such as a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin is used. The resin has an olefin compound of 20 to 80% by weight and a thiol compound of 20 to 80% by weight. The sum of the weight % of the olefinic compound and the weight % of the thiol compound may be 100.

又,聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂等之聚烯-聚 硫醇系樹脂,相較於丙烯酸系光硬化性樹脂等之丙烯酸系樹脂,係亦有著硬化收縮為少之優點。以下,針對由本實施形態所致之覆蓋玻璃20與硬化收縮間的關係作說明。 Further, a polyene-poly group such as a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin The thiol-based resin has an advantage that the hardening shrinkage is less than that of the acrylic resin such as the acrylic photocurable resin. Hereinafter, the relationship between the cover glass 20 and the curing shrinkage according to the present embodiment will be described.

如同後述一般,補強部26,係藉由使塗布液 27硬化所形成者。因此,若是在塗布液27硬化時產生有大的收縮,則會成為使補強部26之尺寸的精確度降低。 又,若是產生有大的收縮,則補強部26和單位基材22之間的密著性也會降低。又,若是在單位基材22之厚度方向(單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b的法線方向)上產生大的收縮,則在補強部26之面26a、26b和單位基材22之面22a、22b之間會產生大的階差,其結果,補強部26和單位基材22之間的邊界會變得容易被觀察者視覺辨認出來。故而,作為構成補強部26之樹脂材料,係以硬化時之收縮盡可能為小的材料為理想。若依據本實施形態,則藉由使用聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂等之聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂來構成補強部26,就算是當在硬化時產生有收縮的情況時,於單位基材22之厚度為700μm的情況中,亦可將在補強部26之面26a、26b和單位基材22之面22a、22b之間所產生的階差,例如抑制在1~10μm的範圍內。 As will be described later, the reinforcing portion 26 is made by applying a coating liquid. 27 formed by hardening. Therefore, if a large shrinkage occurs during the curing of the coating liquid 27, the accuracy of the size of the reinforcing portion 26 is lowered. Moreover, if a large shrinkage occurs, the adhesiveness between the reinforcing portion 26 and the unit base member 22 also decreases. Further, when a large contraction occurs in the thickness direction of the unit base member 22 (the normal direction of the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22), the surfaces 26a and 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 and the unit base are formed. A large step is generated between the faces 22a and 22b of the material 22, and as a result, the boundary between the reinforcing portion 26 and the unit base member 22 is easily visually recognized by the observer. Therefore, it is preferable that the resin material constituting the reinforcing portion 26 is a material that shrinks as much as possible during curing. According to the present embodiment, the reinforcing portion 26 is formed by using a polyene-polythiol-based resin such as a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin, even when shrinkage occurs during curing. In the case where the thickness of the unit base material 22 is 700 μm, the step difference between the faces 26a and 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 and the faces 22a and 22b of the unit base member 22 may be suppressed, for example, at 1 to 10 μm. Within the scope.

另外,如同後述一般,壓縮應力層24a之厚 度,一般而言係成為10~100μm之範圍內。故而,選擇硬化時之收縮為小的材料,並藉由此來將單位基材22和補強部26之間的階差分別抑制在1~10μm的範圍內一事,係能夠導致收縮的程度變得較壓縮應力層24a之厚度更小。因此,就算是在硬化時而補強部26有所收縮,也能夠防止拉張應力層24b在覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c或後述之貫通孔23的壁面23c處而露出的情形。 In addition, as will be described later, the thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is thick. The degree is generally in the range of 10 to 100 μm. Therefore, when the shrinkage at the time of hardening is selected to be small, and the step difference between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 is suppressed to be in the range of 1 to 10 μm, respectively, the degree of shrinkage can be caused. The thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is smaller. Therefore, even if the reinforcing portion 26 is contracted at the time of curing, the tensile stress layer 24b can be prevented from being exposed at the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 or the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 to be described later.

以下,針對聚烯-聚硫醇系光硬化性樹脂等之聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂的組成作詳細說明。 Hereinafter, the composition of the polyene-polythiol-based resin such as a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin will be described in detail.

烯化合物,係為在1個分子中具有2個以上的碳-碳雙鍵之多官能性的化合物,並可列舉出乙烯基醚類,乙烯基酯類,烯丙醚類,烯丙醇衍生物,烯丙異氰酸衍生物,苯乙烯類,丙烯酸衍生物,甲基丙烯酸衍生物,二乙烯基苯等。若是將上述烯化合物之一部分以與硫醇化合物間之反應性為高的順序來作排列,則係成為乙烯基醚類,乙烯基酯類,烯丙醚類,烯丙異氰酸衍生物,丙烯酸衍生物,苯乙烯類。 The olefinic compound is a polyfunctional compound having two or more carbon-carbon double bonds in one molecule, and examples thereof include vinyl ethers, vinyl esters, allyl ethers, and allyl alcohol derivatives. , allylic isocyanide derivatives, styrenes, acrylic acid derivatives, methacrylic acid derivatives, divinylbenzene, and the like. When a part of the above-mentioned olefinic compound is arranged in order of high reactivity with a thiol compound, it is a vinyl ether, a vinyl ester, an allyl ether, and an allylic isocyanic acid derivative. Acrylic derivatives, styrene.

硫醇化合物,係為在1個分子中具有2個以上的硫醇基之化合物,並可列舉出巰基羧酸與多元醇之酯類、脂肪族聚硫醇類以及芳香族聚硫醇類、其他之聚硫醇類。係可使用此些之1種或者是2種以上。 The thiol compound is a compound having two or more thiol groups in one molecule, and examples thereof include esters of mercaptocarboxylic acids and polyhydric alcohols, aliphatic polythiols, and aromatic polythiols. Other polythiols. One type or two or more types may be used.

作為在上述巰基羧酸與多元醇之酯類中的巰基羧酸,係可列舉出巰乙酸、α-巰基丙酸以及β-巰基丙酸等。 Examples of the mercaptocarboxylic acid in the ester of the above mercaptocarboxylic acid and a polyhydric alcohol include indole acetic acid, α-mercaptopropionic acid, and β-mercaptopropionic acid.

上述烯化合物(a)以及硫醇化合物(b)之 配合比例,較理想,烯化合物(a)之不飽和鍵結數和硫醇化合物(b)之硫醇基數間的比例,係成為2:1~1:2之範圍。若是超過1:2而硫醇基成為多量,則由於未反應的硫醇基會在硬化反應後之組成物中多量殘留,因此係並不理想,又,若是硫醇基成為較2:1而更少,則會導致身為硫醇基的效果之高密著性以及不會受到起因於氧所導致的聚合阻礙之優點有所減少,因此亦並不理想。 The above olefin compound (a) and thiol compound (b) The mixing ratio is preferably such that the ratio of the number of unsaturated bonds of the olefinic compound (a) to the number of thiol groups of the thiol compound (b) is in the range of 2:1 to 1:2. If it is more than 1:2 and the amount of the thiol group is large, since the unreacted thiol group remains in a large amount in the composition after the hardening reaction, it is not preferable, and if the thiol group becomes 2:1, Less is less desirable because of the high adhesion of the thiol group and the fact that it is not hindered by the polymerization inhibition caused by oxygen.

光聚合起始劑,係並未特別作限定,而可使 用周知之光聚合起始劑。具體而言,例如,作為光聚合起始劑,當為具有自由基聚合性不飽和基之樹脂系的情況時,係可將苯乙酮類(例如,以商品名稱Irgacure184(Ciba Specialty Chemicals公司製)而在市面上販賣的1-羥基-環己基-苯基-酮),二苯基酮類,噻噸酮類,乙基苯基酮類,芐基類,醯基氧化膦類,安息香,安息香甲基醚等作單獨或者是混合使用。 The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, but may be The initiator is polymerized by well-known light. Specifically, as a photopolymerization initiator, when it is a resin system having a radical polymerizable unsaturated group, acetophenones can be used (for example, under the trade name Irgacure 184 (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Co., Ltd.) ) commercially available as 1-hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-one), diphenyl ketones, thioxanthones, ethyl phenyl ketones, benzyls, fluorenylphosphine oxides, benzoin, Benzoin methyl ether or the like is used singly or in combination.

上述光聚合起始劑(c),較理想,係相對於 上述烯化合物(a)以及硫醇化合物(b)之合計量而以0.001~10質量%之比例來作添加。若是未滿0.001質量%,則會有發生無法充分地產生光聚合反應的問題之虞。 又,就算是添加超過10質量%,也無法產生效果的提升。 The above photopolymerization initiator (c) is preferred, as opposed to The total amount of the olefin compound (a) and the thiol compound (b) is added in a ratio of 0.001 to 10% by mass. If it is less than 0.001% by mass, there is a problem that the photopolymerization reaction cannot be sufficiently caused. Moreover, even if it is added more than 10% by mass, the effect cannot be improved.

接下來,參考圖5,針對單位基材22之側面 22c以及補強部26的形狀作更詳細的說明。圖5,係為將圖3之覆蓋玻璃20的側面20c作擴大展示之剖面圖。 Next, referring to FIG. 5, for the side of the unit substrate 22 The shape of 22c and the reinforcing portion 26 will be described in more detail. Fig. 5 is a cross-sectional view showing the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 of Fig. 3 in an enlarged manner.

首先,針對補強部26的形狀作說明。如圖5 中所示一般,補強部26,係包含有:在與單位基材22之第1面22a同一平面上而從第1面22a之端部22ae的近旁起朝向側方向延伸之第1面26a、在與單位基材22之第2面22b同一平面上而從第2面22b之端部22be的近旁起朝向側方向延伸之第2面26b、以及在補強部26之第1面26a和第2面26b之間而延展的側面26c。以下,針對能夠藉由此種包含有第1面26a以及第2面26b之補強部26所帶來的優點作說明。 First, the shape of the reinforcing portion 26 will be described. Figure 5 As shown in the above, the reinforcing portion 26 includes a first surface 26a extending in the lateral direction from the vicinity of the end portion 22ae of the first surface 22a on the same plane as the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22, On the same plane as the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22, the second surface 26b extending in the lateral direction from the vicinity of the end portion 22be of the second surface 22b, and the first surface 26a and the second surface of the reinforcing portion 26 Side 26c extending between faces 26b. Hereinafter, the advantages brought about by the reinforcing portion 26 including the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b will be described.

首先,為了進行比較,針對在上述之專利文 獻2中所能夠考慮到的課題作說明。當如同專利文獻2一般而藉由對於基材之外周面進行邊緣處理來設置對於基材之側面作補強之補強部的情況時,在補強部之面和基材之面之間,會成為形成有階差。故而,在補強部和基材之間的邊界處,會成為容易產生光的散射或者是成為使光的透射率以及反射率產生大幅度的改變。其結果,在補強部和基材之間的邊界會成為容易被觀察者所視覺辨識出來。亦即是,可以推測到,覆蓋玻璃之設計性係會降低。又,當覆蓋玻璃之補強部露出於外部的情況時,對於觸控面板之操作感係會被階差所阻礙。 First, for the purpose of comparison, for the above patent The topics that can be considered in the 2 are explained. When the reinforcing portion for reinforcing the side surface of the substrate is provided by performing edge treatment on the outer peripheral surface of the substrate as in Patent Document 2, the surface of the reinforcing portion and the surface of the substrate are formed. There is a step. Therefore, at the boundary between the reinforcing portion and the substrate, scattering of light is likely to occur or a large change in transmittance and reflectance of light is caused. As a result, the boundary between the reinforcing portion and the substrate becomes easily visually recognized by the observer. That is, it can be inferred that the design of the cover glass will be lowered. Further, when the reinforcing portion of the cover glass is exposed to the outside, the operational feeling of the touch panel is hindered by the step.

相對於此,若依據本實施形態,則單位基材 22之第1面22a和補強部26之第1面26a,係位置在同一平面上。同樣的,單位基材22之第2面22b和補強部26之第2面26b,係位置在同一平面上。亦即是,在單位 基材22和補強部26之間,係幾乎或者是完全不存在有任何的階差。具體而言,單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b和補強部26之第1面26a以及第2面26b之間的階差,係分別成為10μm以下。因此,係能夠對於觀察者以視覺而辨識出單位基材22和補強部26之間之邊界的情況作抑制。故而,若依據本實施形態之補強部26,則係能夠同時達成覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c的強度之確保以及覆蓋玻璃20之設計性的確保。又,也不會有起因於階差而導致對於觸控面板之操作感有所阻礙的問題。又,如同上述一般,壓縮應力層24a之厚度,一般而言係成為10~100μm之範圍內。故而,當單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b和補強部26之第1面26a以及第2面26b之間的階差乃身為10μm以下的情況時,亦即是當階差為較壓縮應力層24a之厚度而更小的情況時,於單位基材22之側面22c處,單位基材22之壓縮應力層24a和補強部26係成為至少會部分性地重疊。故而,係能夠將在單位基材22之側面22c處而露出的拉張應力層24b,藉由補強部26來無空隙地作覆蓋。因此,係能夠更確實地提高覆蓋玻璃20之耐衝擊性。 In contrast, according to the embodiment, the unit substrate The first surface 22a of the 22 and the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 are positioned on the same plane. Similarly, the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 are positioned on the same plane. That is, in the unit There is almost no step difference between the substrate 22 and the reinforcing portion 26. Specifically, the step between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 is 10 μm or less. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the observer visually recognizes the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26. Therefore, according to the reinforcing portion 26 of the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously ensure the strength of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 and the design of the cover glass 20. Moreover, there is no problem that the operation feeling of the touch panel is hindered due to the step. Further, as described above, the thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is generally in the range of 10 to 100 μm. Therefore, when the step between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 is 10 μm or less, that is, when When the difference is smaller than the thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a, the compressive stress layer 24a of the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 are at least partially overlapped at the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22. Therefore, the tensile stress layer 24b exposed at the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 can be covered by the reinforcing portion 26 without a gap. Therefore, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be more surely improved.

較理想,補強部26之第1面26a以及第2面 26b,係分別在與單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b同一平面上,至少涵蓋300μm地而從端部22ae以及端部22be起朝向側方向延展。藉由此,係能夠更確實地確保覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c的強度之確保以及覆蓋玻璃 20之設計性。另外,所謂「同一平面上」,係與上述之階差的情況相同地,為指補強部26之第1面26a以及第2面26b中之至少涵蓋300μm地而從端部22ae以及端部22be起朝向側方向延展的部份、以及單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b,此兩者之間的在單位基材22之厚度方向上的間隔係成為10μm以下。 Preferably, the first surface 26a and the second surface of the reinforcing portion 26 are preferably 26b is formed on the same plane as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22, and extends at least 300 μm from the end portion 22ae and the end portion 22be toward the lateral direction. Thereby, it is possible to more surely ensure the strength of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 and cover the glass. 20 design. In the same manner as in the case of the above-described step, the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 cover at least 300 μm from the end portion 22ae and the end portion 22be. The portion extending in the side direction and the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 are spaced apart from each other by 10 μm or less in the thickness direction of the unit base member 22.

接著,針對補強部26的側面26c作說明。於 圖5中,補強部26之第1面26a的端部,係標示為元件符號26ae,補強部26之第2面26b的端部,係標示為元件符號26be。如圖5中所示一般,側面26c,係作為在端部26ae和端部26be之間而略平坦地延展之平坦面,而構成之。又,第1面26a和側面26c,係以略直角而相交,同樣的,第2面26b和側面26c,係以略直角而相交。亦即是,在本實施形態中,於圖5之左右方向(第1面26a和第2面26b所延展之方向)上的端部26ae之位置和端部26be之位置,係相互一致。 Next, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 will be described. to In Fig. 5, the end of the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 is denoted by the component symbol 26ae, and the end of the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 is denoted by the component symbol 26be. As shown in Fig. 5, the side surface 26c is formed as a flat surface which is slightly flatly extended between the end portion 26ae and the end portion 26be. Further, the first surface 26a and the side surface 26c intersect at a slight angle, and similarly, the second surface 26b and the side surface 26c intersect at a slight angle. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the end portion 26ae and the position of the end portion 26be in the left-right direction (the direction in which the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b are extended) in Fig. 5 coincide with each other.

接著,針對單位基材22的側面22c之形狀作 說明。如圖5中所示一般,單位基材22之側面22c,係包含有第1側面22d以及第2側面22e。第1側面22d,係與單位基材22之第1面22a的端部22ae相交,並且係隨著接近單位基材22之第2面22b側而朝向外側延展。 又,第2側面22e,係與單位基材22之第2面22b的端部22be相交,並且係隨著接近單位基材22之第1面22a側而朝向外側延展,之後與第1側面22d會合。因此,第 1側面22d和第2側面22e間的會合部分,係成為朝向外側突出。於此情況,由於補強部26係成為將單位基材22之側面22c作夾入的形態,因此,係能夠將補強部26堅牢地密著於單位基材22之側面22c處。 Next, the shape of the side surface 22c of the unit substrate 22 is made. Description. As shown in FIG. 5, the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 includes a first side surface 22d and a second side surface 22e. The first side surface 22d intersects the end portion 22ae of the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22, and extends toward the outer side as it approaches the second surface 22b side of the unit base member 22. Further, the second side surface 22e intersects the end portion 22be of the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22, and extends toward the outer side as it approaches the first surface 22a side of the unit base member 22, and then the first side surface 22d. meet. Therefore, the first The meeting portion between the side surface 22d and the second side surface 22e protrudes outward. In this case, since the reinforcing portion 26 is formed to sandwich the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the reinforcing portion 26 can be firmly adhered to the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22.

具備有此種形狀之第1側面22d以及第2側面22e,例如係如同後述一般,在將基材30作分割以得到單位基材22時,藉由從基材30之第1面側以及第2面側之雙方起而對於基材30進行濕蝕刻,來形成之。 The first side surface 22d and the second side surface 22e having such a shape are, for example, as described later, when the base material 30 is divided to obtain the unit base material 22, the first surface side and the first surface of the base material 30 are obtained. The base material 30 is formed by wet etching from both sides of the two sides.

(覆蓋玻璃之尺寸) (covering the size of the glass)

接著,針對覆蓋玻璃20之尺寸作說明。首先,針對被設置在單位基材22的側面22c上的補強部26之被覆尺寸作說明。於此,所謂被覆尺寸,係指在沿著補強部26之側面26c的法線方向之方向上之補強部26的長度。補強部26之側面26c的法線方向,係與圖5中之左右方向相平行。 Next, the size of the cover glass 20 will be described. First, the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 will be described. Here, the cover size refers to the length of the reinforcing portion 26 in the direction along the normal direction of the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26. The normal direction of the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is parallel to the left-right direction in FIG.

於圖5中,補強部26之被覆尺寸的最小值, 係標示為元件符號Tmin。另外,在本實施形態中,如同上述一般,單位基材22之第1側面22d,係隨著接近第2面22b側而朝向外側延展。又,單位基材22之第2側面22e,係隨著接近第1面22a側而朝向外側延展。又,如同上述一般,補強部26之側面26c,係成為與第1面26a以及第2面26b以直角而相交之平坦面。因此,如圖5中所示一般,在第1側面22d和第2側面22e相互會合的位 置處,補強部26之被覆尺寸係成為最小值Tmin。 In FIG. 5, the minimum value of the covering size of the reinforcing portion 26, It is marked as the component symbol Tmin. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first side surface 22d of the unit base member 22 is extended outward as it approaches the second surface 22b side. Moreover, the second side surface 22e of the unit base member 22 is extended toward the outer side as it approaches the first surface 22a side. Further, as described above, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is a flat surface that intersects the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b at right angles. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5, in general, the first side 22d and the second side 22e meet each other. At the location, the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 becomes the minimum value Tmin.

補強部26之被覆尺寸的最小值Tmin,係以 就算是當對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c等而施加有衝擊的情況時也能夠對於單位基材22之側面22c作保護的方式,來適當作設定。例如,補強部26之被覆尺寸的最小值Tmin,係被設定為20μm以上。 The minimum value Tmin of the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 is Even when an impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 or the like, the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 can be appropriately set. For example, the minimum value Tmin of the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 is set to 20 μm or more.

又,在本實施形態中,於第1面26a之位置 或者是第2面26b之位置處,補強部26之被覆尺寸係成為最大值。另外,若是補強部26之被覆尺寸的最大值變得過大,則可以推測到,當對於覆蓋玻璃20而施加有衝擊的情況時,補強部26會變得容易從單位基材22而剝離。又,由於在覆蓋玻璃20處之玻璃的比例會減少而樹脂的比例會增加,因此,可以推測到,覆蓋玻璃20之強度也會降低。考慮到此點,補強部26之被覆尺寸的最大值,較理想,在被覆為最薄的部分(於圖5中,係為標示為元件符號Tmin之部分)處,係被設定為250μm以下,在被覆為最厚的部份(於圖5中,係為標示為元件符號Tmax之部分)處,係被設定為500μm以下。 Further, in the present embodiment, the position of the first surface 26a is Alternatively, the position of the second surface 26b is such that the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 is the maximum value. In addition, when the maximum value of the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 is excessively large, it is presumed that when the impact is applied to the cover glass 20, the reinforcing portion 26 is easily peeled off from the unit base material 22. Further, since the proportion of the glass at the cover glass 20 is decreased and the proportion of the resin is increased, it is presumed that the strength of the cover glass 20 is also lowered. In view of this point, the maximum value of the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 is preferably set to 250 μm or less at the portion that is covered as the thinnest portion (the portion indicated as the component symbol Tmin in FIG. 5). The portion covered with the thickest portion (in the portion indicated by the component symbol Tmax in Fig. 5) is set to be 500 μm or less.

作為其中一例,在圖5所示之例中,可考慮 將在被覆為最薄之部分處的補強部26之被覆尺寸Tmin設定為100μm,並將在被覆為最厚的部份處之補強部26之被覆尺寸Tmax設定為300μm。 As an example, in the example shown in FIG. 5, consider The coating size Tmin of the reinforcing portion 26 at the portion covered with the thinnest portion was set to 100 μm, and the covering size Tmax of the reinforcing portion 26 at the portion covered with the thickest portion was set to 300 μm.

覆蓋玻璃20之厚度(亦即是單位基材22之 厚度以及補強部26之厚度),係因應於所要求之強度以 及覆蓋玻璃20之面積等而適當設定,但是,例如係成為0.1mm~1mm之範圍內。 Covering the thickness of the glass 20 (that is, the unit substrate 22) The thickness and the thickness of the reinforcing portion 26 are determined according to the required strength. The area of the cover glass 20 and the like are appropriately set, but are, for example, in the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm.

(覆蓋玻璃之製造方法) (Manufacturing method of covering glass)

接著,針對製造出由上述一般之構成所成的覆蓋玻璃20之方法,參考圖6A~圖7D來作說明。 Next, a method of manufacturing the cover glass 20 formed by the above-described general configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A to 7D.

首先,參考圖6A~圖6E(a)、(b),對於 使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材30來形成具有單位基材22以及保護膜81、82之單位層積體35的工程作說明。另外,圖6A、圖6B(a)、圖6C、圖6D(a)以及圖6E(a),係為對於本工程中之基材30作展示的剖面圖。又,圖6E(b),係為對於圖6E(a)中所示之單位層積體35作擴大展示之剖面圖。又,圖6B(b)以及圖6D(b),係為對於本工程中之基材30作展示的平面圖。 First, referring to FIG. 6A to FIG. 6E (a), (b), for The construction of the unit laminate 30 having the unit base material 22 and the protective films 81 and 82 is described using a base material 30 made of a large tempered glass. 6A, 6B(a), 6C, 6D(a), and 6E(a) are cross-sectional views showing the substrate 30 in the present process. Further, Fig. 6E(b) is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged display of the unit laminated body 35 shown in Fig. 6E(a). 6B(b) and 6D(b) are plan views showing the substrate 30 in this project.

首先,如同圖6A中所示一般,準備由大型之 強化玻璃所成的基材30。基材30,係包含有:第1面30a、和位於第1面30a之相反側之第2面30b、以及在第1面30a和第2面30b之間而延展的側面30c。如圖6A中所示一般,在基材30之第1面30a、第2面30b以及側面30c處,係被形成有壓縮應力層24a,又,在壓縮應力層24a之內側,係存在有拉張應力層24b。如此這般,基材30之表面,係全部為藉由壓縮應力層24a所形成。 First, as shown in Figure 6A, it is prepared by a large one. A substrate 30 made of tempered glass. The base material 30 includes a first surface 30a, a second surface 30b on the opposite side of the first surface 30a, and a side surface 30c extending between the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b. As shown in FIG. 6A, generally, a compressive stress layer 24a is formed on the first surface 30a, the second surface 30b, and the side surface 30c of the substrate 30, and further, inside the compressive stress layer 24a, there is a pull. Tensile stress layer 24b. In this manner, the surface of the substrate 30 is entirely formed by the compressive stress layer 24a.

接著,如同圖6B(a)、(b)中所示一般, 在基材30之第1面30a上,於特定之複數的區劃中,形 成第1裝飾部60以及觸控面板感測部40(要素部形成工程)。例如,在圖6B(b)中,係於藉由將基材30之第1面30a於紙面之上下方向而區劃成2行並於紙面之左右方向而區劃成3列所得到的6個區劃之各者中,形成第1裝飾部60以及觸控面板感測部40。另外,基材30之區劃數量,係並未特別作限定。作為在基材第1面30a側形成第1裝飾部60以及觸控面板感測部40之方法,係適宜使用周知之方法,例如係使用光微影法。另外,在以下之說明中,係亦有將第1裝飾部60以及觸控面板感測部40總稱為要素部70的情形。 Then, as shown in (a) and (b) of FIG. 6B, On the first surface 30a of the substrate 30, in a specific plural division, the shape The first decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 (the element portion forming project) are formed. For example, in FIG. 6B(b), the first surface 30a of the base material 30 is divided into two rows by the upper and lower sides of the paper surface, and six divisions are formed in three rows in the left and right direction of the paper surface. Each of the first decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 is formed. In addition, the number of divisions of the substrate 30 is not particularly limited. As a method of forming the first decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 on the first surface 30a side of the substrate, a well-known method is preferably used, for example, a photolithography method is used. In the following description, the first decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 are collectively referred to as the element portion 70.

之後,實施在基材30之第1面30a上以及第 2面30b上而於特定之複數的區劃中設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82的保護膜形成工程。首先,如同圖6C中所示一般,在基材30之第1面30a上,設置將分別被設置在複數之區劃中的要素部70連續性地作覆蓋之第1保護膜81。又,在基材30之第2面30b上,設置第2保護膜82。在圖6C所示之例中,第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82,係分別以覆蓋基材30之第1面30a以及第2面30b之全區域的方式而被作設置。 Thereafter, it is implemented on the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 and A protective film forming process of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is provided in a plurality of specific divisions on the two faces 30b. First, as shown in FIG. 6C, the first protective film 81 in which the element portions 70 respectively provided in the plurality of divisions are continuously covered is provided on the first surface 30a of the substrate 30. Further, a second protective film 82 is provided on the second surface 30b of the substrate 30. In the example shown in FIG. 6C, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to cover the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the base material 30.

保護膜81、82,係為作為在藉由使用有氟酸 等之後述之濕蝕刻來對於基材30進行分割時用以保護要素部70的抗蝕層而起作用者。只要是具備有對於為了分割基材30所使用的蝕刻液而具有耐性者,則關於構成保護膜81、82之材料,係並不特別作限定。例如,作為構 成保護膜81、82之材料,係可使用具備有50~100μm之厚度的二軸延展聚丙烯或無延展聚丙烯等。於此情況,係藉由隔著具有20μm之厚度的黏著層來將二軸延展聚丙烯或無延展聚丙烯之薄片貼附在基材30之第1面30a上以及第2面30b上,而構成保護膜81、82。 The protective films 81 and 82 are used as the use of hydrofluoric acid by using The wet etching described later will function to protect the resist layer of the element portion 70 when the substrate 30 is divided. The material constituting the protective films 81 and 82 is not particularly limited as long as it has resistance to the etching liquid used to divide the substrate 30. For example, as a structure As the material of the protective films 81 and 82, biaxially stretched polypropylene or non-stretched polypropylene having a thickness of 50 to 100 μm can be used. In this case, a sheet of biaxially stretched polypropylene or non-stretched polypropylene is attached to the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 and the second surface 30b by an adhesive layer having a thickness of 20 μm. The protective films 81 and 82 are formed.

之後,如圖6D(a)、(b)中所示一般,將 涵蓋第1面30a以及第2面30b之全區域地而設置之第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82,於第1面30a以及第2面30b之每一區劃處作分斷。藉由此,在覆蓋各要素部70之第1保護膜81以及與其相對應之第2保護膜82處,係沿著各區劃之邊界而被形成有間隙。 After that, as shown in (a) and (b) of Figure 6D, The first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 which are provided over the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b are divided at each of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b. As a result, a gap is formed along the boundary between the respective regions in the first protective film 81 covering the respective element portions 70 and the second protective film 82 corresponding thereto.

將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82作分斷 之方法,係並未特別作限定,而可採用各種的方法。例如,係亦可使用具備有與圖6D(b)中所示之第1保護膜81的形狀相對應之形狀的模具,來將第1保護膜81之不必要部分(成為間隙之部分)除去。在第2面30b側,亦同樣的,可藉由使用具備有與第1保護膜81用之模具相對應之形狀的模具,來將第2保護膜82之不必要部分(成為間隙之部分)除去。除此之外,亦可利用雷射加工,來將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82之不必要部分除去。 The first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are separated The method is not particularly limited, and various methods can be employed. For example, a mold having a shape corresponding to the shape of the first protective film 81 shown in FIG. 6D(b) may be used to remove unnecessary portions (parts of the gap) of the first protective film 81. . Similarly to the second surface 30b side, an unnecessary portion of the second protective film 82 (which is a portion of the gap) can be used by using a mold having a shape corresponding to the mold for the first protective film 81. Remove. In addition to this, unnecessary portions of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed by laser processing.

之後,如圖6E(a)中所示一般,實施沿著被 設置在基材30之各區劃處的第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82之間隙而將基材30切斷之切斷工程。具體而言,係 藉由從基材30之第1面30a側以及第2面30b側起,而將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82作為抗蝕層並對於基材30進行濕蝕刻,來將基材30切斷。作為蝕刻液,係如同上述一般而使用氟酸等。藉由此,如圖6E(a)中所示一般,能夠得到具備含有玻璃之單位基材22和被設置在單位基材22之第1面22a側處的要素部70和被設置在單位基材22之第1面22a上並覆蓋要素部70之第1保護膜81以及被設置在單位基材22之第2面22b上之第2保護膜82的單位層積體35。 Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6E(a), the implementation is along The cutting process in which the base material 30 is cut by the gap between the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 in each division of the substrate 30 is provided. Specifically, The first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are used as a resist layer from the first surface 30a side and the second surface 30b side of the substrate 30, and the substrate 30 is wet-etched to form the substrate. 30 cut off. As the etching liquid, hydrofluoric acid or the like is used as described above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6E(a), the element portion 70 including the glass base material 22 and the element portion 70 provided on the first surface 22a side of the unit substrate 22 can be obtained and disposed on the unit base. The first surface 22a of the material 22 covers the first protective film 81 of the element portion 70 and the unit laminated body 35 of the second protective film 82 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22.

圖6E(b),係為對於圖6E(a)中所示之單 位層積體35作擴大展示之剖面圖。如圖6E(b)中所示一般,第1保護膜81,係構成為相較於單位基材22之第1面22a而更朝向側方向突出。同樣的,第2保護膜82,係構成為相較於單位基材22之第2面22b而更朝向側方向突出。單位基材22和第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82之間的此種關係,係為藉由在進行使用有蝕刻液之上述之切斷工程時,涵蓋著能夠藉由從單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b的雙方起所進行的蝕刻而使單位基材22被貫通的程度之時間來持續進行蝕刻工程一事,所實現者。另外,在蝕刻工程中,通常,在單位基材22之側面22c中的第1面22a以及第2面22b之近旁的位置處,不論是於深度方向或者是水平方向之何者,蝕刻均係等向性地進行。因此,如圖6E(b)中所示一般,在單位基材22之側面22c中的第1面22a以及第2面22b之近 旁處,相較於第1面22a和第2面22b之間的中間部分,蝕刻係進行至更深處。其結果,係能夠得到在與端部22ae相交的同時亦隨著接近第2面22b側而朝向外側延展之第1側面22d、和在與端部22be相交的同時亦隨著接近第1面22a側而朝向外側延展之第2側面22e。 Figure 6E(b) is for the single shown in Figure 6E(a) The layered laminate 35 is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged display. As shown in FIG. 6E(b), the first protective film 81 is configured to protrude further in the lateral direction than the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22. Similarly, the second protective film 82 is configured to protrude further in the lateral direction than the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22. The relationship between the unit base material 22 and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is covered by the unit substrate by performing the above-described cutting process using the etching liquid. In the case where both of the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the 22 are etched and the unit substrate 22 is penetrated, the etching process is continued. Further, in the etching process, generally, in the vicinity of the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the side surface 22c of the unit substrate 22, the etching is performed regardless of the depth direction or the horizontal direction. Conductively. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6E(b), in general, the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the side surface 22c of the unit substrate 22 are close to each other. On the side, the etching system proceeds to a deeper position than the intermediate portion between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b. As a result, it is possible to obtain the first side surface 22d that extends toward the outer side while approaching the end portion 22ae, and the first side surface 22d that extends toward the outer side as close to the second surface 22b side, and also approaches the first surface 22a while intersecting the end portion 22be. The second side surface 22e that extends laterally toward the outside.

接著,參考圖7A~圖7D,針對用以藉由在單 位層積體35之單位基材22的側面22c處設置補強部(樹脂等)一事來得到對於側面作了補強的覆蓋玻璃20之工程作說明。 Next, referring to FIG. 7A to FIG. 7D, An example of the work of obtaining the cover glass 20 which is reinforced with the side surface is provided in the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 of the position laminated body 35 in order to obtain a reinforcing portion (resin or the like).

首先,如圖7A中所示一般,實施將包含有紫 外線硬化樹脂或者是熱硬化性樹脂等之硬化性材料的塗布液27塗布在單位基材22之側面22c上的塗布工程。於此,係針對使用包含有丙烯酸系樹脂和光聚合起始劑之塗布液的情況作說明。 First, as shown in Figure 7A, the implementation will contain purple The external hardening resin or the coating liquid 27 of the curable material such as a thermosetting resin is applied to the coating process on the side surface 22c of the unit substrate 22. Here, a case where a coating liquid containing an acrylic resin and a photopolymerization initiator is used will be described.

在塗布工程中,塗布液27,係如圖7A中所示一般,被填充在被單位基材22之側面22c、第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82所包圍的空間內。另外,塗布液27,係亦可如圖7A中所示一般,以會溢出於第1保護膜81之端面81c上以及第2保護膜82之端面82c上的程度來作塗布。 In the coating process, the coating liquid 27 is filled in a space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82 as shown in FIG. 7A. Further, as shown in FIG. 7A, the coating liquid 27 may be applied to the extent that it overflows on the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82.

接著,將溢出於第1保護膜81之端面81c上 以及第2保護膜82之端面82c上的塗布液27,使用刮刀等來刮除。藉由此,如圖7B中所示一般,塗布液27之表面,係在第1保護膜81之端面81c以及第2保護膜82之端面82c上而成為相互一致。亦即是,塗布液27之第1 保護膜81側的液面之端部的位置,係成為與第1保護膜81之端面81c的位置相互一致,塗布液27之第2保護膜82側的液面之端部的位置,係成為與第2保護膜82之端面82c的位置相互一致。 Then, it will overflow on the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81. The coating liquid 27 on the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82 is scraped off using a doctor blade or the like. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B, the surface of the coating liquid 27 is aligned with the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82. That is, the first of the coating liquid 27 The position of the end portion of the liquid surface on the side of the protective film 81 is the same as the position of the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81, and the position of the end portion of the liquid surface on the second protective film 82 side of the coating liquid 27 is The positions of the end faces 82c of the second protective film 82 coincide with each other.

之後,實施使被設置在單位基材22之側面 22c上的塗布液27硬化之硬化工程。於此,係藉由對於塗布液27照射紫外線等之光,來使塗布液27硬化。藉由此,係在單位基材22之側面22c上形成補強部26。 Thereafter, it is implemented to be disposed on the side of the unit substrate 22 The hardening work of the coating liquid 27 on 22c is hardened. Here, the coating liquid 27 is cured by irradiating the coating liquid 27 with light such as ultraviolet rays. Thereby, the reinforcing portion 26 is formed on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22.

接著,將單位基材22之第1面22a上的第1 保護膜81以及單位基材22之第2面22b上的第2保護膜82除去。藉由此,如圖7C中所示一般,能夠得到具備有單位基材22和被設置在單位基材22之側面22c上的補強部26之覆蓋玻璃20。之後,如圖7D中所示一般,亦可在單位基材22之第1面22a側或者是補強部26之第1面26a側的第1裝飾部60之外側之位置處,設置第2裝飾部62。第2裝飾部62,例如係為以會呈現與第1裝飾部60相同之顏色的方式所構成者。藉由更進而設置此種第2裝飾部62,係可將能夠呈現所期望之顏色的非主動區域Aa2之範圍更朝向外側擴張,而能夠謀求像是對於從外周部而來之漏光作防止等之設計性的提升。又,第2裝飾部62,較理想,係以當沿著覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a之法線方向來作觀察的情況時會與補強部26相互重疊的方式而被構成。 Next, the first surface on the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 The protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22 are removed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 7C, the cover glass 20 provided with the unit base material 22 and the reinforcement part 26 provided in the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 can be obtained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 7D, a second decoration may be provided at a position on the first surface 22a side of the unit base member 22 or on the outer side of the first decorative portion 60 on the first surface 26a side of the reinforcing portion 26. Section 62. The second decorative portion 62 is formed, for example, in such a manner as to exhibit the same color as the first decorative portion 60. By further providing such a second decorative portion 62, the range of the inactive area Aa2 capable of exhibiting a desired color can be further expanded outward, and the image can be prevented from leaking light from the outer peripheral portion. Design improvement. Moreover, it is preferable that the second decorative portion 62 is configured to overlap the reinforcing portion 26 when viewed along the normal direction of the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20.

若依據本實施形態,則係在單位基材22之側 面22c上,設置有由硬化性樹脂所成之補強部26。因此,在對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c而施加有衝擊的情況時所傳導至單位基材22之側面22c處的力,係藉由補強部26而被舒緩,而能夠對於在單位基材22之側面22c處產生碎裂等之損傷的情形作抑制。藉由此,就算是當並未在單位基材22之側面22c處形成有壓縮應力層的情況時,亦能夠充分地提高覆蓋玻璃20之耐衝擊性。又,由於就算是當在單位基材22之側面22c處露出有拉張應力層24b的情況時,亦能夠藉由補強部26來將露出了的拉張應力層24b作覆蓋,因此,係能夠充分地提高覆蓋玻璃20之耐衝擊性。 According to this embodiment, it is on the side of the unit substrate 22. The surface 22c is provided with a reinforcing portion 26 made of a curable resin. Therefore, when the impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20, the force transmitted to the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is relieved by the reinforcing portion 26, and can be applied to the unit base material 22. The occurrence of damage such as chipping at the side surface 22c is suppressed. Thereby, even when the compressive stress layer is not formed on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be sufficiently improved. Further, even when the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the exposed tensile stress layer 24b can be covered by the reinforcing portion 26, so that it is possible to The impact resistance of the cover glass 20 is sufficiently improved.

又,若依據本實施形態,則構成補強部26之 樹脂材料,係包含有聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂。因此,就算是在補強部26會對於大氣等之外部環境而有所露出的情況時,也能夠對起因於氧而導致聚合反應被阻礙的情形作抑制。藉由此,係能夠得到經過了充分的聚合反應之具備有所期望之硬度的補強部26。又,藉由使用聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,係能夠防止補強部26之硬化過度地變高的情形。 故而,係能夠得到對於硬度和韌性間保持有良好的平衡度之補強部26。又,藉由使用聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,係能夠適當地確保補強部26之表面的浸濕性。因此,在形成了補強部26之後而被塗布於補強部26之第1面26a上的塗布液(例如用以形成第2裝飾部62之塗布液),係能夠安定地停留在第1面26a上。亦即是,係能夠充分地確保 補強部26之第1面26a的印刷適合性。藉由此,係成為能夠將第2裝飾部62等之構成要素均勻地形成在補強部26之第1面26a上。 Further, according to the present embodiment, the reinforcing portion 26 is formed. The resin material contains a polyene-polythiol resin. Therefore, even when the reinforcing portion 26 is exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere, it is possible to suppress the polymerization reaction from being caused by oxygen. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the reinforcing portion 26 having a desired hardness which has undergone sufficient polymerization. Moreover, by using a polyene-polythiol-based resin, it is possible to prevent the hardening of the reinforcing portion 26 from being excessively increased. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the reinforcing portion 26 which maintains a good balance between hardness and toughness. Moreover, by using a polyene-polythiol-based resin, the wettability of the surface of the reinforcing portion 26 can be appropriately ensured. Therefore, the coating liquid applied to the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 after forming the reinforcing portion 26 (for example, the coating liquid for forming the second decorative portion 62) can be stably settled on the first surface 26a. on. That is, the system can fully ensure The printing suitability of the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26. By this, it is possible to uniformly form the constituent elements of the second decorative portion 62 and the like on the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26.

又,在本實施形態中,補強部26,係如同上 述一般,乃身為被形成在藉由從單位基材22之第1面22a而朝向側方向突出的第1保護膜81從單位基材22之第2面22b而朝向側方向突出的第2保護膜82所定位的空間內者。因此,如同圖7C以及圖7D中所示一般,單位基材22之第1面22a和補強部26之第1面26a,係位置在同一平面上。同樣的,單位基材22之第2面22b和補強部26之第2面26b,係位置在同一平面上。亦即是,在單位基材22和補強部26之間,係幾乎或者是完全不存在有任何的階差。因此,係能夠對於觀察者以視覺而辨識出單位基材22和補強部26之間之邊界的情況作抑制。故而,若依據本實施形態之補強部26,則係能夠同時達成覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c的強度之確保以及覆蓋玻璃20之設計性的確保。又,在使手指等之外部導體於覆蓋玻璃20上進行滑動時,係能夠對於外部導體被單位基材22和補強部26之間之邊界所勾到的感覺作抑制。故而,係能夠對起因於階差而導致對於觸控面板之操作感有所阻礙的情形作抑制。又,係能夠對起因於階差而導致手指等之外部導體受傷的情形作抑制。 Further, in the present embodiment, the reinforcing portion 26 is as above. In general, the second protective film 81 that protrudes in the lateral direction from the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 protrudes from the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 toward the lateral direction. The space in which the protective film 82 is positioned. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7C and FIG. 7D, the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 are positioned on the same plane. Similarly, the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 are positioned on the same plane. That is, there is almost no step difference between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26, almost or completely. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the observer visually recognizes the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26. Therefore, according to the reinforcing portion 26 of the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously ensure the strength of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 and the design of the cover glass 20. Moreover, when the outer conductor such as a finger is slid on the cover glass 20, the feeling that the outer conductor is hooked by the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the operational feeling of the touch panel is hindered due to the step difference. Further, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the outer conductor of the finger or the like is injured due to the step.

又,在本實施形態中,於補強部26處,係如 同上述一般,藉由使用刮刀等來將溢出於第1保護膜81 之端面81c上以及第2保護膜82之端面82c上的塗布液27刮除,而對於補強部26之側面26c進行面整理。因此,在藉由使塗布液27硬化一事所得到的補強部26處,其之第1面26a之端部26ae的位置,係成為與第1保護膜81之端面81c之位置相互一致。同樣的,補強部26之第2面26b之端部26be的位置,係成為與第2保護膜82之端面82c之位置相互一致。如此這般,若依據本實施形態,則係能夠基於保護膜81、82之端面81c、82c的位置,來制定補強部26之第1面26a之端部26ae的位置以及第2面26b之端部26be的位置。 Further, in the present embodiment, at the reinforcing portion 26, for example, As described above, the first protective film 81 is overflowed by using a doctor blade or the like. The coating liquid 27 on the end surface 81c and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82 is scraped off, and the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is surface-finished. Therefore, the position of the end portion 26ae of the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 obtained by curing the coating liquid 27 coincides with the position of the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81. Similarly, the position of the end portion 26be of the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 coincides with the position of the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82. According to the present embodiment, the position of the end portion 26ae of the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 and the end of the second surface 26b can be determined based on the positions of the end faces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82. The location of the 26be.

如同上述一般,補強部26,係藉由具備有特定之流動性的塗布液27所形成。故而,在並不使用如同保護膜81、82一般之框地而將塗布液27作塗布的情況時,係難以對於塗布液27之厚度和形狀等的尺寸作精密的控制。 另一方面,保護膜81、82之端面81c、82c,係如同上述一般,藉由利用有模具或雷射之加工,來以高精確度而制定其之位置。故而,若依據本實施形態,則作為塗布液27之厚度和形狀等的尺寸之精確度,係能夠實現準據於在利用有模具或雷射之加工中的精確度之精確度。因此,若依據本實施形態,則係能夠以良好精確度來制定補強部26之端部26ae、26be的位置,亦即是能夠以良好精確度來制定覆蓋玻璃20之端部的位置。藉由此,在進行覆蓋玻璃20和顯示裝置15、殼體間之組裝時,係能夠提高工程之容易度和良率。又,當如同本實施形態一般而在覆蓋 玻璃20處設置有第1裝飾部60和觸控面板感測部40的情況時,係亦能夠將相對於顯示裝置15之第1裝飾部60和觸控面板感測部40的加工精確度提高。藉由此,係能夠實現附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置10之高度的設計性和操作性。 As described above, the reinforcing portion 26 is formed by the coating liquid 27 having a specific fluidity. Therefore, when the coating liquid 27 is applied without using a frame as in the case of the protective films 81 and 82, it is difficult to precisely control the size of the coating liquid 27 such as the thickness and shape. On the other hand, the end faces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82 are as described above, and their positions are determined with high precision by processing using a mold or a laser. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the accuracy of the dimensions such as the thickness and shape of the coating liquid 27 can achieve the accuracy of the accuracy in the processing using the mold or the laser. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the positions of the end portions 26ae and 26be of the reinforcing portion 26 can be determined with good precision, that is, the position at which the end portion of the cover glass 20 can be formed with good precision. Thereby, the ease of construction and the yield can be improved when assembling the cover glass 20, the display device 15, and the casing. Also, when covering as in the present embodiment When the first decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 are provided in the glass 20, the processing accuracy of the first decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 with respect to the display device 15 can be improved. . Thereby, the design and operability of the height of the display device 10 with the cover glass can be achieved.

又,當補強部26之側面26c係構成為在端部 26ae和端部26be之間而略平坦地延展之平坦面的情況時,不僅是補強部26之端部26ae、26be的位置,就連補強部26之側面26c全區域之位置,也會成為因應於保護膜81、82之端面81c、82c的位置而被制定。亦即是,不僅是覆蓋玻璃20之端部,而亦能夠將覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c全區域的加工精確度提高。 Further, when the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is formed at the end portion In the case of a flat surface extending slightly between 26ae and the end portion 26be, not only the position of the end portions 26ae and 26be of the reinforcing portion 26 but also the position of the entire side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 may be responded to. The positions of the end faces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82 are determined. That is, not only the end portion of the cover glass 20 but also the processing accuracy of the entire area of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 can be improved.

又,若依據本實施形態,則由於覆蓋玻璃20 之側面20c係以由樹脂所成之補強部26而構成,因此,相較於將覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c藉由玻璃來構成的情況,係並不需要針對覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c的邊緣部而進行由去角等所致的防裂傷加工。 Moreover, according to this embodiment, the cover glass 20 is Since the side surface 20c is formed of the reinforcing portion 26 made of a resin, the edge portion of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is not required as compared with the case where the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is formed of glass. The anti-cracking process caused by the chamfering or the like is performed.

另外,覆蓋玻璃20之補強部26,係亦可構成 為會呈現與被設置在覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a側的第1裝置部60和第2裝飾部62相同之顏色。例如,補強部26,係亦可包含有與在第1裝飾部60和第2裝飾部62中所包含的著色顏料相同顏色之著色顏料。於此情況,非動作區域Aa2之外緣周邊的區域,係成為會被視覺辨識成與位置在較其更內側之第1裝飾部60和第2裝飾部62之區 域相同顏色的區域。因此,係能夠得到與在使第1裝飾部60和第2裝飾部62一直延伸至非動作區域Aa2之外緣處的情況時相同之設計上的效果。 In addition, the reinforcing portion 26 covering the glass 20 may also be configured. The same color as that of the first device portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62 provided on the first surface 20a side of the cover glass 20 is exhibited. For example, the reinforcing portion 26 may include a coloring pigment having the same color as the coloring pigment contained in the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62. In this case, the area around the outer edge of the non-action area Aa2 is the area of the first decorative part 60 and the second decorative part 62 which are visually recognized and positioned further inside. The area of the same color in the domain. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same design effect as in the case where the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62 are extended to the outer edge of the non-operating region Aa2.

一般而言,第1裝飾部60和第2裝飾部62,係藉由將包含有樹脂材料以及顏料之塗布液塗布在覆蓋玻璃20上(單位基材22上或者是補強部26上),而形成之。另一方面,想要將塗布液正確地塗布在非動作區域Aa2之外緣周邊的區域處一事,係並非容易。 In general, the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62 are coated on the cover glass 20 (on the unit base material 22 or the reinforcing portion 26) by applying a coating liquid containing a resin material and a pigment. Formed. On the other hand, it is not easy to apply the coating liquid correctly at the area around the outer edge of the non-action area Aa2.

於此,當補強部26為如同上述一般地被著色的情況時,係並不將第1裝飾部60和第2裝飾部62一直設置至非動作區域Aa2之外緣周邊的區域處,非動作區域Aa2之外緣周邊的區域係成為被以所期望之顏色作視覺辨認。 因此,係能夠使設置第1裝飾部60和第2裝飾部62之工程成為更為容易者。 In the case where the reinforcing portion 26 is colored as described above, the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62 are not always provided in the region around the outer edge of the non-operating region Aa2, and the non-action is not performed. The area around the outer edge of the area Aa2 is visually recognized in the desired color. Therefore, it is possible to make the process of providing the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62 easier.

另外,所謂「相同顏色」,係指2個顏色的 色度相互接近並成為無法以肉眼來判別出顏色之差異的程度。更具體而言,所謂「相同顏色」,係指2個顏色的色差△E* ab為10以下,較理想,係為3以下。又,所謂「相異顏色」,係指2個顏色的色差△E* ab為較10更大。於此,所謂色差△E* ab,係為基於在L*a*b*表色系中之L*、a*以及b*而算出之值,並身為會成為關連於在以肉眼而進行觀察的情況時之顏色之差異的指標之值。 In addition, the "same color" means that the chromaticities of the two colors are close to each other and the degree of difference in color cannot be visually recognized. More specifically, the term "identical color" means that the color difference ΔE * ab of the two colors is 10 or less, and preferably 3 or less. In addition, the "different color" means that the color difference ΔE * ab of two colors is larger than 10. Thereto, so-called color difference △ E * ab, is based on the L * a * b * color system of L *, a * and b * values of the calculated, and as will be connected to the visually performed The value of the indicator of the difference in color when observing the situation.

另外,係可對於上述之實施形態而施加各種 變更。以下,一面參考圖面,一面針對數個變形例作說 明。在以下之說明以及於以下說明所使用的圖面中,針對能夠與上述之實施形態相同地來構成的部份,係使用與對於在上述之實施形態中所對應的部份而使用之元件符號相同的元件符號,並省略重複之說明。又,當在上述之實施形態中所能夠得到的作用效果明顯為在變形例中也能夠得到者的情況時,係亦有將該說明省略的情形。 In addition, various types can be applied to the above embodiments. change. In the following, one side of the reference picture, one for several variants Bright. In the following description and the drawings used in the following description, the components that can be configured in the same manner as the above-described embodiments are used with the component symbols used for the portions corresponding to the above-described embodiments. The same component symbols are omitted, and the repeated description is omitted. Further, in the case where the operational effects that can be obtained in the above-described embodiments are apparently obtained in the modified example, the description will be omitted.

(第1變形例) (First Modification)

在上述之本實施形態中,係針對將在基材30之第1面30a上形成第1裝飾部60和觸控面板感測部40等之要素部70的要素部形成工程先於在基材30上設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82之保護膜形成工程而實施的例子作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,亦可先對於並未被設置有要素部70之狀態下的基材30設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82,之後再實施將基材30切斷之工程以及在單位基材22之側面22c上設置補強部26之工程。藉由此,如圖8中所示一般,係能夠得到具備有單位基材22和被設置在單位基材22之側面22c上的補強部26之覆蓋玻璃20。 In the above-described embodiment, the element portion of the element portion 70 in which the first decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 are formed on the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 is formed prior to the substrate. An example in which the protective film forming process of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is provided on the 30 is shown. However, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be provided on the substrate 30 in a state in which the element portion 70 is not provided, and then the substrate 30 may be cut. The work of breaking and the work of providing the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8, a cover glass 20 including the unit base member 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.

在圖8所示之本變形例中,補強部26,係亦 能夠以呈現特定之顏色的方式而被構成。例如,補強部26,係亦可包含有會呈現特定之顏色的著色顏料。於此情況,係可並不設置第1裝飾部60或第2裝飾部62地,而實現像是對於從外周部而來之漏光作防止等之設計性的提 升。又,雖並未圖示,但是,在圖8所示之本變形例中,覆蓋玻璃20,係亦可更進而具備有在形成了補強部26之後而被設置於補強部26之第1面26a上的裝飾部。 In the present modification shown in FIG. 8, the reinforcing portion 26 is also It can be constructed in such a way as to present a specific color. For example, the reinforcing portion 26 may also contain a coloring pigment that exhibits a specific color. In this case, the first decorative portion 60 or the second decorative portion 62 can be omitted, and the design of the light leakage from the outer peripheral portion can be prevented. Rise. Further, although not shown, in the present modification shown in FIG. 8, the cover glass 20 may be further provided with the first surface of the reinforcing portion 26 after the reinforcing portion 26 is formed. The decorative part on 26a.

(第2變形例) (Second modification)

在上述之第1變形例中,係針對對於並未被形成有第1裝飾部60和觸控面板感測部40之雙方的狀態下之基材30而設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82之例作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,亦可先對於並未被設置有觸控面板感測部40但是被形成有第1裝飾部60之狀態下的基材30設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82,之後再實施將基材30切斷之工程以及在單位基材22之側面22c上設置補強部26之工程。藉由此,如圖9中所示一般,係能夠得到具備有單位基材22和被設置在單位基材22之第1面22a上之第1裝飾部60以及被設置在單位基材22之側面22c上的補強部26之覆蓋玻璃20。又,如圖9中所示一般,覆蓋玻璃20,係亦可更進而具備有在形成了補強部26之後而被設置於第1裝飾部60之外側的位置處之第2裝飾部62。 In the first modification described above, the first protective film 81 and the second protection are provided for the base material 30 in a state in which both the first decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 are not formed. An example of the film 82 is shown. However, the first protective film 81 and the first substrate are provided in the substrate 30 in a state in which the first decorative portion 60 is not formed, but the touch panel sensing portion 40 is not provided. 2 The protective film 82 is followed by a process of cutting the substrate 30 and a process of providing the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit substrate 22. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9 , the first decorative portion 60 including the unit substrate 22 and the first surface 22 a of the unit substrate 22 and the unit substrate 22 can be obtained. The reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c covers the glass 20. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 , the cover glass 20 may further include a second decorative portion 62 that is provided at a position on the outer side of the first decorative portion 60 after the reinforcing portion 26 is formed.

(第3變形例) (Third Modification)

亦可在藉由使塗布液27硬化並得到補強部26之後,藉由對於補強部26之側面26c進行加工,而對於側面26c之形狀、亦即是對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c之形狀作整 理。補強部26,由於係如同上述一般為藉由樹脂材料所構成,因此,相較於將覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c藉由強化玻璃來構成的情況,對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c進行加工並得到所期望之形狀一事係變得更為容易。又,亦難以發生起因於加工所導致的強度降低或者是微碎裂的發生作為加工方法,例如係可採用使用有研磨機之加工。 After the coating liquid 27 is hardened and the reinforcing portion 26 is obtained, the shape of the side surface 26c, that is, the shape of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 can be adjusted by processing the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26. Reason. Since the reinforcing portion 26 is generally made of a resin material as described above, the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is processed and obtained in comparison with the case where the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is formed of tempered glass. The shape of the desired thing becomes easier. Further, it is also difficult to cause a decrease in strength or a microcracking due to processing as a processing method, and for example, a processing using a grinder can be employed.

例如,如圖10中所示一般,亦能夠以將補強 部26之第1面26a側的端部26ae以及第2面26b側的端部26be之雙方削去的方式,來對於補強部26之側面26c進行加工。在圖10所示之例中,補強部26之側面26c中的與第1面26a相交的部份以及與第2面26b相交的部份之雙方,係被加工成圓角面。就算是於此情況,亦同樣的,只要在側面22c之一部分處殘留有尚未被加工之部分(未加工部分26d),則便可基於利用有保護膜81、82之上述的塗布方法,來確保在覆蓋玻璃20處之高度的外形尺寸精確度。另外,在圖10中,雖係針對以使側面26c成為圓角面的方式來對於側面26c進行加工的例子作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此,雖並未圖示,但是,亦能夠以使側面26c成為角面的方式來對於側面26c進行加工。又,雖並未圖示,但是,亦能夠以至少將補強部26之第1面26a側的端部26ae以及第2面26b側的端部26be中之其中一方、例如至少將第1面26a側的端部26ae削去的方式,來對於補強部26之側面26c進行加工。 For example, as shown in FIG. 10, it is also possible to The side surface 26ae on the first surface 26a side of the portion 26 and the end portion 26be on the second surface 26b side are cut away, and the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is processed. In the example shown in Fig. 10, both the portion of the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 that intersects the first surface 26a and the portion that intersects the second surface 26b are processed into rounded surfaces. Even in this case, as long as the unprocessed portion (the unprocessed portion 26d) remains in a portion of the side surface 22c, it can be ensured based on the above-described coating method using the protective films 81 and 82. The dimensional accuracy at the height of the cover glass 20. In addition, although FIG. 10 shows an example in which the side surface 26c is processed so that the side surface 26c becomes a rounded surface, it is not limited to this, but it is not shown in figure, It is also possible to process the side surface 26c so that the side surface 26c becomes an angular surface. Further, although not shown, at least one of the end portion 26ae on the first surface 26a side of the reinforcing portion 26 and the end portion 26be on the second surface 26b side, for example, at least the first surface 26a can be provided. The side end portion 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 is processed by cutting the side end portion 26ae.

(第4變形例) (Fourth Modification)

在上述之本實施形態中,雖係針對藉由在被單位基材22之側面22c、第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82所包圍的空間內而將塗布液27作塗布的方式來形成補強部26的例子作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此。就算是在藉由其他的方法而形成補強部26或者是後述之孔用補強部28等之補強部的情況時,亦同樣的,藉由使構成補強部之樹脂材料包含有聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,係能夠得到經過了充分的聚合反應之具備有所期望之硬度以及韌性的補強部。又,係能夠充分地確保補強部之印刷適合性。作為補強部的形成方法之例,係可列舉出射出成形法、點注(dispensing)法、噴霧塗布法、滾輪塗布法、浸漬法等。圖11,係為對於具備有藉由浸漬法所形成的補強部26之覆蓋玻璃20的其中一例作展示之剖面圖。 In the above-described embodiment, the coating liquid 27 is formed by coating the coating liquid 27 in the space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82. An example of the reinforcing portion 26 is shown, but it is not limited thereto. In the case where the reinforcing portion 26 or the reinforcing portion such as the hole reinforcing portion 28 to be described later is formed by another method, the resin material constituting the reinforcing portion contains the polyene-polysulfide. The alcohol-based resin is a reinforcing portion having a desired hardness and toughness after being subjected to a sufficient polymerization reaction. Moreover, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the printing suitability of the reinforcing portion. Examples of the method for forming the reinforcing portion include an injection molding method, a dispensing method, a spray coating method, a roll coating method, and a dipping method. Fig. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a cover glass 20 provided with a reinforcing portion 26 formed by a dipping method.

(第5變形例) (Fifth Modification)

在上述之本實施形態中,係針對側面22c為包含有在與單位基材22之第1面22a的端部22ae相交的同時亦隨著接近單位基材22之第2面22b側而朝向外側延展之第1側面22d和在與單位基材22之第2面22b的端部22be相交的同時亦隨著接近單位基材22之第1面22a側而朝向外側延展之第2側面22e的例子作了展示。然而,只要是能夠設置補強部26,則係並不特別對側面22c之形狀 作限定。例如,如圖12中所示一般,側面22c,係亦能夠以相對於第1面22a以及第2面22b而相正交的方式來延展。具備有此種形狀之側面22c,例如係能夠藉由利用雷射來將基材30切斷一事而形成之。又,亦可藉由利用切刀或雷射等來在基材30之表面上形成切劃線,之後藉由對於基材30施加打擊力或彎折應力來以切劃線作為起點而將基材30切斷一事,而形成圖12中所示之側面22c。 In the above-described embodiment, the side surface 22c includes the end portion 22ae of the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22, and also faces the second surface 22b side of the unit base material 22 toward the outer side. The first side surface 22d which is extended and the second side surface 22e which extends toward the outer side as it approaches the first surface 22a side of the unit base material 22 while intersecting the end portion 22be of the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 Made a show. However, as long as the reinforcing portion 26 can be provided, the shape of the side surface 22c is not particularly Limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 12, the side surface 22c can also be extended so as to be orthogonal to the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b. The side surface 22c having such a shape can be formed, for example, by cutting the substrate 30 with a laser. Further, a scribe line may be formed on the surface of the substrate 30 by using a cutter or a laser, and then a base line is used as a starting point by applying a striking force or a bending stress to the substrate 30. The material 30 is severed to form the side surface 22c shown in FIG.

(第6變形例) (Sixth Modification)

在上述之本實施形態中,係針對在單位基材22之側面22c處拉張應力層24b有所露出的例子作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,如圖13中所示一般,亦可不僅是在單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b處,而亦在側面22c處被形成有壓縮應力層24a。於此情況,亦同樣的,藉由在單位基材22之側面22c上設置補強部26,係能夠將在對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c而施加有衝擊的情況時所傳導至單位基材22之側面22c處的力作舒緩。 In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 is shown. However, it is not limited thereto, and as shown in FIG. 13, it may be formed not only at the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22 but also at the side surface 22c. Layer 24a. In this case as well, by providing the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, it is possible to conduct the unit substrate 22 when an impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20. The force at the side 22c is soothing.

在上述之第5以及第6變形例中,針對在側 面22c上形成補強部26之方法,係並未特別作限定,而可適宜採用在上述之本實施形態以及各變形例中所列舉出的方法等。另外,在藉由利用第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82來塗布塗布液27而形成補強部26的情況時,第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82,係亦可為在將基材30切 斷並得到了單位基材22之後再被設置於單位基材22之第1面22a上以及第2面22b上者。 In the fifth and sixth modifications described above, on the side The method of forming the reinforcing portion 26 on the surface 22c is not particularly limited, and the methods and the like described in the above-described embodiments and modifications may be suitably employed. In addition, when the coating liquid 27 is applied by the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 to form the reinforcing portion 26, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be Material 30 cut After the unit substrate 22 is obtained, the unit substrate 22 is placed on the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 and the second surface 22b.

(第7變形例) (Seventh Modification)

在上述之實施形態和各變形例中,係針對在單位基材22之側面中的構成單位基材22之外形的側面22c上形成有補強部26的例子作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,如圖14中所示一般,當在單位基材22處被形成有貫通孔25的情況時,係亦可在貫通孔25之壁面25c上設置補強部。亦即是,在本案發明中,所謂「單位基材22之側面」,係為亦包含有被形成於單位基材22處之貫通孔25的壁面25c之概念。貫通孔25,例如,係為為了在顯示裝置處搭載攝像機或揚聲器等所設置者。在圖14以及後述之圖15中,為了與被設置在構成單位基材22之外形的側面22c上之補強部相互區分,係將被設置在貫通孔25之壁面25c上的補強部以元件符號28來作標示。 In the above-described embodiment and each modification, an example in which the reinforcing portion 26 is formed on the side surface 22c which is formed outside the unit base material 22 on the side surface of the unit base member 22 is shown. However, it is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 14 , when the through hole 25 is formed in the unit base material 22 , a reinforcing portion may be provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 . In other words, in the present invention, the "side surface of the unit base member 22" is a concept including the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 formed in the unit base material 22. The through hole 25 is, for example, a device for mounting a camera or a speaker on the display device. In Fig. 14 and Fig. 15 which will be described later, in order to distinguish the reinforcing portions provided on the side surface 22c which is formed outside the unit base material 22, the reinforcing portion provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 is referred to as a component symbol. 28 to mark.

圖15,係為對於在圖14中所示之貫通孔25 的壁面25c上形成補強部28的工程作展示之剖面圖。另外,在圖15中,係針對不僅是在貫通孔25之壁面25c上而亦在構成單位基材22之外形的側面22c上形成有補強部26的模樣作展示。在圖15所示之例中,第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82,係以相較於單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c而更朝向內側突出的方式而被作設置。因此,藉由在被單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c、第1 保護膜81以及第2保護膜82所包圍的空間內塗布塗布液27,如圖15中所示一般,係能夠以高尺寸精確度來在壁面25c上形成補強部28。 Figure 15 is for the through hole 25 shown in Figure 14. A cross-sectional view of the construction of the reinforcing portion 28 is formed on the wall surface 25c. In addition, in Fig. 15, a pattern in which the reinforcing portion 26 is formed not only on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 but also on the side surface 22c which is formed outside the unit base member 22 is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 15 , the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to protrude further inward than the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 . Therefore, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is the first The coating liquid 27 is applied to the space surrounded by the protective film 81 and the second protective film 82, and as shown in Fig. 15, the reinforcing portion 28 can be formed on the wall surface 25c with high dimensional accuracy.

在本變形例中,亦同樣的,被設置在單位基 材22之貫通孔225的壁面25c上之補強部28,係包含有聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂。因此,係能夠在貫通孔25之壁面25c上,設置經過了充分的聚合反應之具備有所期望之硬度的補強部28。又,係能夠充分地確保補強部28之印刷適合性。 In the present modification, the same applies to the unit base. The reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 225 of the material 22 contains a polyene-polythiol resin. Therefore, it is possible to provide the reinforcing portion 28 having a desired hardness which has undergone sufficient polymerization reaction on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25. Moreover, the printing suitability of the reinforcing portion 28 can be sufficiently ensured.

(其他變形例) (Other variants)

又,在上述之本實施形態中,係針對補強部26以及塗布液27為包含有藉由加熱或紫外線照射等而進行聚合反應並會起因於此而硬化的硬化性樹脂之例來作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此。只要是在被塗布於單位基材22之側面22c上時為具有特定之流動性,並且之後能夠硬化,則在第1實施形態以及各變形例還有後述之第2實施形態以及各變形例中,作為用以形成補強部26之塗布液27,係可使用各種的流動體。例如,作為塗布液27,係亦可使用由藉由熱而作了熔融的狀態下之樹脂材料所成的流動體。於此情況,係在將塗布液27塗布於單位基材22之側面22c上之後,藉由使塗布液27冷卻並固化,而使塗布液27變硬。藉由此,係能夠得到包含有樹脂材料之補強部26。如此這般,在本實施形態中,所謂「硬 化」,係為不僅是藉由加熱或紫外線照射等來使樹脂材料硬化的現象而亦包含有藉由使其冷卻固化來使樹脂材料硬化的現象之概念。另外,係可藉由自然冷卻來使樹脂材料冷卻固化,或者是亦可藉由強制冷卻來使樹脂材料冷卻固化。又,所謂「固化」,係指從氣體或液體之狀態而改變為固體之狀態。 In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the reinforcing portion 26 and the coating liquid 27 are exemplified by a curable resin which is polymerized by heating or ultraviolet irradiation or the like and which is cured by the curing reaction. However, the system is not limited to this. When it is applied to the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 to have specific fluidity and can be cured later, the first embodiment and each modification example include the second embodiment and each modification described later. As the coating liquid 27 for forming the reinforcing portion 26, various fluids can be used. For example, as the coating liquid 27, a fluid obtained from a resin material in a state of being melted by heat can also be used. In this case, after the coating liquid 27 is applied onto the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, the coating liquid 27 is cooled and solidified to harden the coating liquid 27. Thereby, the reinforcing portion 26 containing the resin material can be obtained. In this way, in the present embodiment, the so-called "hard" The concept of not only curing the resin material by heating or ultraviolet irradiation but also the phenomenon of curing the resin material by cooling and solidifying it is included. Further, the resin material may be cooled and solidified by natural cooling, or the resin material may be cooled and solidified by forced cooling. Moreover, "curing" means a state of changing from a state of a gas or a liquid to a solid.

另外,雖係針對上述之實施形態而對於數個 的變形例作了說明,但是,當然的,係亦可將複數之變形例適宜作組合並適用之。 In addition, although it is for the above embodiments, it is for several The modification is described, but it is a matter of course that a plurality of modifications can be suitably combined and applied.

第2實施形態 Second embodiment

接著,針對本發明之第2實施形態作說明。在上述之第1實施形態的圖14以及圖15所示之變形例中,係針對被設置有補強部之單位基材22之側面乃身為被形成在單位基材22處的貫通孔25之壁面25c的例子作了展示。在本實施形態中,係針對在貫通孔25之壁面25c處設置補強部28的情況作更詳細之說明。在本實施形態中,係亦將被設置在貫通孔25之壁面25c處的補強部28,稱作孔用補強部28。又,係亦將被設置在構成單位基材22之外形的側面22c上之補強部,稱作側面用補強部26。在第2實施形態中,針對與第1實施形態相同之部分,係附加相同的元件符號,並省略詳細之說明。 Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the modification shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 of the above-described first embodiment, the side surface of the unit base member 22 provided with the reinforcing portion is formed as a through hole 25 formed in the unit base member 22. An example of wall 25c is shown. In the present embodiment, a case where the reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 will be described in more detail. In the present embodiment, the reinforcing portion 28 provided at the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 is also referred to as a hole reinforcing portion 28. Further, the reinforcing portion provided on the side surface 22c constituting the outer shape of the unit base member 22 is also referred to as a side reinforcing portion 26. In the second embodiment, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

(覆蓋玻璃) (covering glass)

圖16,係為對於本實施形態中之覆蓋玻璃20作展示之平面圖。如圖16中所示一般,覆蓋玻璃20,係具備有:於平面觀察時為呈具有四角隅之矩形狀之形狀的單位基材22、和被設置在單位基材22之側面22c上的補強部26。側面用補強部26,係為為了對於單位基材22之側面22c作保護而任意設置者。在圖16所示之例中,側面用補強部26,係以於平面觀察時將單位基材22之側面22c作包圍的方式而被作設置。側面用補強部26和單位基材22之側面22c的形狀,由於係與上述之第1實施形態的情況相同,因此係省略詳細之說明。 Fig. 16 is a plan view showing the cover glass 20 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover glass 20 is provided with a unit base material 22 having a rectangular shape having a square angle as viewed in plan, and a reinforcing member provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22. Part 26. The side reinforcing portion 26 is arbitrarily provided for protecting the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22. In the example shown in Fig. 16, the side reinforcing portion 26 is provided so as to surround the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 in plan view. The shape of the side reinforcing portion 26 and the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

如圖16中所示一般,在覆蓋玻璃20處,係 被形成有貫通孔23,此貫通孔23之壁面,係藉由孔用補強部28所構成。孔用補強部28,係為為了提高貫通孔23之耐衝擊性而設置在被形成於單位基材22處之貫通孔的壁面上者。以下,參考圖17以及圖18,針對孔用補強部28作更詳細的說明。圖17,係為圖16中所示之覆蓋玻璃20的沿著線XXVII之剖面圖。又,圖18,係為將圖17之覆蓋玻璃20的貫通孔23作擴大展示之剖面圖。 As shown in Fig. 16, generally, at the cover glass 20, The through hole 23 is formed, and the wall surface of the through hole 23 is constituted by the hole reinforcing portion 28. The hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface of the through hole formed in the unit base member 22 in order to improve the impact resistance of the through hole 23. Hereinafter, the hole reinforcing portion 28 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view along line XXVII of the cover glass 20 shown in Figure 16. Further, Fig. 18 is a cross-sectional view showing the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 of Fig. 17 in an enlarged manner.

如圖17中所示一般,孔用補強部28,係設置 在被形成於單位基材22處之貫通孔25的壁面25c上。另外,如同根據後述之圖19D(c)而可清楚得知一般,所謂「單位基材22之貫通孔25」,係指身為並未被設置有孔用補強部28的狀態之貫通單位基材22之孔。又,所謂「覆蓋玻璃20之貫通孔23」,係指其之壁面23c為藉由 被設置在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上之孔用補強部28所構成的貫通覆蓋玻璃20之孔。另外,在本案所添附之圖面中,為了防止圖面記載變得繁雜,對於被設置有孔用補強部28或後述之塗布液27後的貫通孔,原則上係附加元件符號23,並將元件符號25省略。 As shown in Fig. 17, generally, the hole reinforcement portion 28 is provided. It is formed on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 formed in the unit base material 22. In addition, as is clear from the above-described FIG. 19D(c), the "through-hole 25 of the unit base material 22" is a through-unit unit in a state in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is not provided. The hole of the material 22. Further, the term "through-hole 23 of the cover glass 20" means that the wall surface 23c thereof is A hole for covering the glass 20 is formed by the hole reinforcing portion 28 provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. In addition, in the drawing attached to the present invention, in order to prevent the drawing from being complicated, the through hole which is provided with the hole reinforcing portion 28 or the coating liquid 27 to be described later is, in principle, the component symbol 23 is added. The component symbol 25 is omitted.

如圖18中所示一般,單位基材22之拉張應 力層24b,係一直到達至單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c處。亦即是,在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c處,拉張應力層24b係露出。因此,單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c,相較於單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b,對於碎裂等之損傷的耐性係變得較弱。上述之孔用補強部28,係為為了對於此種單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c作保護所設置者。 As shown in Figure 18, the tensile of the unit substrate 22 should be The force layer 24b reaches up to the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit substrate 22. That is, the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed at the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. Therefore, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is weaker than the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 in terms of damage such as chipping. The hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided for protecting the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22.

作為構成孔用補強部28之材料,例如,係使 用會藉由加熱或紫外線照射等而硬化的硬化性樹脂。於此情況,於硬化前之成形時,孔用補強部28係具有所期望的流動性,而,在硬化後,孔用補強部28係成為具有所期望之硬度和強度。藉由此,係能夠同時達成成形性和硬度以及強度上的目標。又,與上述之第1實施形態的情況相同,構成孔用補強部28之材料,係亦可包含有聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂。 As a material constituting the hole reinforcing portion 28, for example, A curable resin which is hardened by heating or ultraviolet irradiation or the like is used. In this case, the hole reinforcing portion 28 has a desired fluidity during molding before curing, and the hole reinforcing portion 28 has a desired hardness and strength after curing. By this, it is possible to simultaneously achieve the goals of formability, hardness, and strength. Further, similarly to the case of the first embodiment described above, the material constituting the hole reinforcing portion 28 may include a polyene-polythiol resin.

(孔用補強部) (hole reinforcement)

接下來,參考圖18,針對單位基材22之貫通孔25 的壁面25c以及孔用補強部28的形狀作更詳細的說明。 Next, referring to FIG. 18, the through hole 25 for the unit substrate 22 is used. The wall surface 25c and the shape of the hole reinforcing portion 28 will be described in more detail.

首先,針對孔用補強部28的形狀作說明。如 圖18中所示一般,孔用補強部28,係包含有:從單位基材22之第1面22a的端部22af起而朝向側方向延伸之第1面28a、從單位基材22之第2面22b的端部22bf起而朝向側方向延伸之第2面28b、以及在第1面28a和第2面28b之間而存在的側面28c。在圖18所示之例中,孔用補強部28之第1面28a,係與單位基材22之第1面22a位置在同一平面上。同樣的,孔用補強部28之第2面28b,係與單位基材22之第2面22b位置在同一平面上。亦即是,與上述之第1實施形態中之補強部26的情況相同,在單位基材22和孔用補強部28之間,係幾乎或者是完全不存在有任何的階差。具體而言,單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b和孔用補強部28之第1面28a以及第2面28b之間的階差,係分別成為10μm以下。因此,係能夠得到與第1實施形態之補強部26的情況時相同之優點。例如,係能夠同時達成覆蓋玻璃20之貫通孔23的強度之確保以及覆蓋玻璃20之設計性的確保。 First, the shape of the hole reinforcing portion 28 will be described. Such as As shown in FIG. 18, the hole reinforcing portion 28 includes a first surface 28a extending from the end portion 22af of the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and extending in the lateral direction, and a unit surface unit 22 The second surface 28b extending toward the side direction and the side surface 28c existing between the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b are formed by the end portion 22bf of the second surface 22b. In the example shown in Fig. 18, the first surface 28a of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is positioned on the same plane as the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22. Similarly, the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is positioned on the same plane as the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22. In other words, as in the case of the reinforcing portion 26 in the first embodiment described above, there is almost no step difference between the unit base member 22 and the hole reinforcing portion 28. Specifically, the step between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is 10 μm or less. Therefore, the same advantages as those in the case of the reinforcing portion 26 of the first embodiment can be obtained. For example, it is possible to simultaneously ensure the strength of the through hole 23 covering the glass 20 and the design of the cover glass 20.

接著,針對孔用補強部28的側面28c作說 明。於圖18中,孔用補強部28之第1面28a的內側之端部,係標示為元件符號28ae,孔用補強部28之第2面28b的內側之端部,係標示為元件符號28be。如同圖18中所示一般,孔用補強部28之第1面28a以及第2面 28b,係亦可分別在與單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b同一平面上延展,直到到達端部28ae以及端部28be處為止。或者是,孔用補強部28之第1面28a以及第2面28b,係亦可分別在與單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b同一平面上,涵蓋有特定之距離地、例如至少涵蓋300μm地,而從端部22af以及端部22bf起朝向側方向延展,之後作彎曲或者是彎折。另外,所謂「同一平面上」,係與上述之階差的情況相同,為指孔用補強部28之第1面28a以及第2面28b中之至少涵蓋300μm地而從端部22af以及端部22bf起朝向側方向延展的部份、以及單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b,此兩者之間的在單位基材22之厚度方向上的間隔係成為10μm以下。 Next, the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is said. Bright. In Fig. 18, the inner end portion of the first surface 28a of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is denoted by the component symbol 28ae, and the inner end portion of the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is denoted by the component symbol 28be. . As shown in Fig. 18, the first surface 28a and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are generally used. Further, 28b may be extended on the same plane as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 until reaching the end portion 28ae and the end portion 28be. Alternatively, the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be on the same plane as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22, and may cover a specific distance. For example, it covers at least 300 μm, and extends from the end portion 22af and the end portion 22bf toward the side direction, and then is bent or bent. In the same manner as in the case of the above-described step, the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 cover at least 300 μm from the end portion 22af and the end portion. The portion extending in the side direction and the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 are 22bf, and the interval between the two in the thickness direction of the unit base member 22 is 10 μm or less.

接著,針對單位基材22的貫通孔25之壁面 25c之形狀作說明。如圖18中所示一般,貫通孔25之壁面25c,係包含有第1壁面25d以及第2壁面25e。第1壁面25d,係與單位基材22之第1面22a相交,並且係隨著接近單位基材22之第2面22b側而朝向貫通孔25之中心側延展。又,第2壁面25e,係與單位基材22之第2面22b相交,並且係隨著接近單位基材22之第1面22a側而朝向貫通孔25之中心側延展,之後與第1壁面25d會合。因此,與側面22c之情況相同,第1壁面25d和第2壁面25e間的會合部分,係成為朝向外側突出。於此情況,由於孔用補強部28係成為將單位基材22之壁面25c 作夾入的形態,因此,係能夠將孔用補強部28堅牢地密著於單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c處。 Next, the wall surface of the through hole 25 of the unit substrate 22 is applied. The shape of 25c is explained. As shown in FIG. 18, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 generally includes a first wall surface 25d and a second wall surface 25e. The first wall surface 25d intersects the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22, and extends toward the center side of the through hole 25 as it approaches the second surface 22b side of the unit base member 22. In addition, the second wall surface 25e intersects the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22, and extends toward the center side of the through hole 25 as it approaches the first surface 22a side of the unit base material 22, and then the first wall surface 25d meeting. Therefore, similarly to the case of the side surface 22c, the meeting portion between the first wall surface 25d and the second wall surface 25e protrudes outward. In this case, the hole reinforcing portion 28 is formed as the wall surface 25c of the unit base member 22. Since the shape of the pinch is formed, the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be firmly adhered to the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22.

具備有此種形狀之第1壁面25d以及第2壁面25e,係與側面22c之第1側面22d以及第2側面22e之情況相同,可藉由從單位基材22之第1面22a側以及第2面22b側之雙方起而對於單位基材22進行濕蝕刻並形成貫通孔25,而得到之。 The first wall surface 25d and the second wall surface 25e having such a shape are the same as those of the first side surface 22d and the second side surface 22e of the side surface 22c, and can be formed from the first surface 22a side of the unit base material 22 and The unit substrate 22 is wet-etched and the through holes 25 are formed on both sides of the two faces 22b.

接著,針對被設置在單位基材22的貫通孔25 之壁面25c上的孔用補強部28之被覆尺寸作說明。於此,所謂孔用補強部28之被覆尺寸,係與上述之第1實施形態之補強部26的情況相同,為指在沿著側面28c的法線方向之方向上的孔用補強部28之長度。孔用補強部28之被覆尺寸的最小值Tmin以及最大值Tmax,係可設定為與上述之第1實施形態之補強部26的情況時相同之範圍。 Next, for the through hole 25 provided in the unit base material 22 The hole in the wall surface 25c is described by the size of the reinforcing portion 28. Here, the cover size of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is the same as the case of the reinforcing portion 26 of the first embodiment described above, and refers to the hole reinforcing portion 28 in the direction along the normal direction of the side surface 28c. length. The minimum value Tmin and the maximum value Tmax of the coating size of the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be set to the same range as in the case of the reinforcing portion 26 of the first embodiment described above.

覆蓋玻璃20之厚度(亦即是單位基材22之 厚度、側面用補強部26之厚度以及孔用補強部28之厚度),係因應於所要求之強度以及覆蓋玻璃20之面積等而適當設定,但是,例如係成為0.1mm~1mm之範圍內。 Covering the thickness of the glass 20 (that is, the unit substrate 22) The thickness, the thickness of the side reinforcing portion 26, and the thickness of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are appropriately set depending on the required strength and the area of the cover glass 20, but are, for example, in the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm.

(覆蓋玻璃之製造方法) (Manufacturing method of covering glass)

接著,針對製造出由上述一般之構成所成的覆蓋玻璃20之方法,參考圖19A~圖20D來作說明。 Next, a method of manufacturing the cover glass 20 formed by the above-described general configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 19A to 20D.

首先,參考圖19A~圖19D(a)、(b)、 (c),對於使用由大型之強化玻璃所成的基材30來形成 具有單位基材22以及保護膜81、82之單位層積體35的工程作說明。另外,圖19A、圖19B、圖19C(a)以及圖19D(a),係為對於本工程中之基材30作展示的剖面圖。又,圖19D(b),係為將在圖19D(a)中所示之單位層積體35的單位基材22之側面22c近旁作擴大展示的剖面圖,圖19D(c),係為將在圖19D(a)中所示之單位層積體35的單位基材22之貫通孔25近旁作擴大展示的剖面圖。又,圖19C(b),係為對於從上方來對於在圖19C(a)中所展示的基材30作了觀察的情況作展示之平面圖。 First, referring to Figs. 19A to 19D(a), (b), (c) for forming a substrate 30 made of large tempered glass The construction of the unit laminate 35 having the unit substrate 22 and the protective films 81 and 82 will be described. 19A, 19B, 19C(a), and 19D(a) are cross-sectional views showing the substrate 30 in the present process. Further, Fig. 19D(b) is a cross-sectional view showing an enlarged view of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 of the unit laminated body 35 shown in Fig. 19D(a), and Fig. 19D(c) is A cross-sectional view showing an enlarged view of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 of the unit laminated body 35 shown in Fig. 19D (a) is shown. Further, Fig. 19C(b) is a plan view showing a case where the substrate 30 shown in Fig. 19C(a) is observed from above.

首先,如同圖19A中所示一般,準備由大型 之強化玻璃所成的基材30。基材30,係包含有:第1面30a、和位於第1面30a之相反側之第2面30b、以及在第1面30a和第2面30b之間而存在的側面30c。如圖19A中所示一般,在基材30之第1面30a、第2面30b以及側面30c處,係被形成有壓縮應力層24a,又,在壓縮應力層24a之內側,係存在有拉張應力層24b。如此這般,基材30之表面,係全部為藉由壓縮應力層24a所形成。 First, as shown in Figure 19A, the preparation is made up of large The substrate 30 made of tempered glass. The base material 30 includes a first surface 30a, a second surface 30b on the opposite side of the first surface 30a, and a side surface 30c existing between the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b. As shown in Fig. 19A, generally, a compressive stress layer 24a is formed on the first surface 30a, the second surface 30b, and the side surface 30c of the substrate 30, and further, inside the compressive stress layer 24a, there is a pull. Tensile stress layer 24b. In this manner, the surface of the substrate 30 is entirely formed by the compressive stress layer 24a.

接著,實施在基材30之第1面30a上以及第 2面30b上而於特定之複數的區劃中設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82的保護膜形成工程。首先,如圖19B中所示一般,在基材30之第1面30a上,設置第1保護膜81,並在基材30之第2面30b上,設置第2保護膜 82。在圖19B所示之例中,第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82,係分別以覆蓋基材30之第1面30a以及第2面30b之全區域的方式而被作設置。 Next, it is implemented on the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 and A protective film forming process of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is provided in a plurality of specific divisions on the two faces 30b. First, as shown in FIG. 19B, a first protective film 81 is provided on the first surface 30a of the substrate 30, and a second protective film is provided on the second surface 30b of the substrate 30. 82. In the example shown in FIG. 19B, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to cover the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the substrate 30, respectively.

之後,如圖19C(a)、(b)中所示一般,將 涵蓋第1面30a以及第2面30b之全區域地而設置之第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82,於基材30之每一區劃處作分斷。例如,如同圖19C(a)、(b)中所示一般,係將保護膜81、82,於藉由將基材30之第1面30a於紙面之上下方向而區劃成2行並於紙面之左右方向而區劃成3列所得到的6個區劃之各者處作分斷。藉由此,在第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82處,係被形成有沿著各區劃之邊界的間隙81a以及間隙82a。各區劃之尺寸,係與藉由將基材30切斷所得到的各單位基材22之尺寸相對應。另外,在本案發明中,係亦有將被切斷前之基材30的各區劃表現為「單位基材22」的情形。 After that, as shown in (a) and (b) of Figure 19C, The first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 which are provided over the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b are divided at each division of the substrate 30. For example, as shown in FIGS. 19C(a) and (b), the protective films 81 and 82 are divided into two rows on the paper surface by placing the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 in the upper and lower directions of the paper. In the left and right direction, each of the six divisions obtained by dividing into three columns is divided. Thereby, the gap 81a and the gap 82a along the boundary of each division are formed in the 1st protective film 81 and the 2nd protective film 82. The size of each division corresponds to the size of each unit base material 22 obtained by cutting the base material 30. Further, in the invention of the present invention, the division of the base material 30 before being cut is expressed as "unit base material 22".

又,如圖19C(a)、(b)所示一般,在與單 位基材22之貫通孔25相對應的位置處,於第1保護膜81上形成孔81b,並於第2保護膜82上形成孔82b。 Moreover, as shown in (a) and (b) of FIG. 19C, in general, At a position corresponding to the through hole 25 of the base material 22, a hole 81b is formed in the first protective film 81, and a hole 82b is formed in the second protective film 82.

在保護膜81、82上形成間隙81a、82a以及 孔81b、82b之具體性的方法,係並未特別作限定,而可採用各種的方法。例如,係亦可使用具備有與圖19C(b)中所示之第1保護膜81的形狀相對應之形狀的模具,來將第1保護膜81之不必要部分(成為間隙以及孔之部分)除去。在第2面30b側,亦同樣的,可藉由使用 具備有與第2保護膜82用之模具相對應之形狀的模具,來將第2保護膜82之不必要部分(成為間隙以及孔之部分)除去。除此之外,亦可利用雷射加工,來將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82之不必要部分除去。 Clearances 81a, 82a are formed on the protective films 81, 82, and The method of the specificity of the holes 81b and 82b is not particularly limited, and various methods can be employed. For example, a mold having a shape corresponding to the shape of the first protective film 81 shown in FIG. 19C(b) may be used to form an unnecessary portion of the first protective film 81 (to be a gap and a part of the hole). ) removed. On the second side 30b side, the same can be used by A mold having a shape corresponding to the mold for the second protective film 82 is provided, and unnecessary portions (parts of the gap and the holes) of the second protective film 82 are removed. In addition to this, unnecessary portions of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed by laser processing.

之後,如圖19D(a)中所示一般,實施沿著 被設置在基材30之各區劃處的保護膜81、82之間隙81a、82a而將基材30切斷並且在基材30(單位基材22)處形成貫通孔25之基材加工工程。具體而言,係藉由實施從基材30之第1面30a側以及第2面30b側起而將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82作為抗蝕層並對於基材30進行濕蝕刻之蝕刻工程,來將基材30切斷,並且形成貫通孔25。作為蝕刻液,係如同上述一般而使用氟酸等。 藉由此,如圖19D(a)中所示一般,能夠得到具備含有玻璃並且被形成有貫通孔25之單位基材22和被設置在單位基材22之第1面22a側上的第1保護膜81以及被設置在單位基材22之第2面22b上的第2保護膜82之單位層積體35。 Thereafter, as shown in Figure 19D(a), the implementation proceeds along A substrate processing process in which the substrate 30 is cut and the through holes 25 are formed in the substrate 30 (unit substrate 22) is provided in the gaps 81a and 82a of the protective films 81 and 82 provided in the respective regions of the substrate 30. Specifically, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are used as a resist layer from the first surface 30a side and the second surface 30b side of the substrate 30, and the substrate 30 is wet-etched. The etching process is performed to cut the substrate 30 and form a through hole 25. As the etching liquid, hydrofluoric acid or the like is used as described above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19D (a), the unit base material 22 including the glass and having the through holes 25 and the first surface 22a provided on the unit surface 22 can be obtained. The protective film 81 and the unit laminated body 35 of the second protective film 82 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22.

圖19D(b),係為對於圖19D(a)中所示之 單位層積體35的單位基材22之側面22c近旁作擴大展示之剖面圖。與上述之第1實施形態的情況相同,係能夠得到在與端部22ae相交的同時亦隨著接近第2面22b側而朝向外側延展之第1側面22d、和在與端部22be相交的同時亦隨著接近第1面22a側而朝向外側延展之第2側面22e。 Figure 19D(b) is for the illustration shown in Figure 19D(a) A cross-sectional view showing an enlarged view of the side surface 22c of the unit substrate 22 of the unit laminate 35 is shown. As in the case of the first embodiment described above, it is possible to obtain the first side face 22d that extends toward the outside as it approaches the second face 22b side, and intersects with the end portion 22be while intersecting the end portion 22ae. The second side surface 22e that extends toward the outside as it approaches the first surface 22a side.

圖19D(c),係為對於圖19D(a)中所示之 單位層積體35的單位基材22之貫通孔25近旁作擴大展示之剖面圖。如圖19D(c)中所示一般,第1保護膜81之孔81b的壁面81d,係位置在較單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c而更靠單位基材22之貫通孔25的中心側處。同樣的,第2保護膜82之孔82b的壁面82d,係位置在較單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c而更靠單位基材22之貫通孔25的中心側處。單位基材22之貫通孔25和第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82之間的此種關係,係與上述之側面22c之情況相同地,為藉由從單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b的雙方起所進行的蝕刻而在單位基材22上形成貫通孔25一事,所實現者。 Figure 19D(c) is for the illustration shown in Figure 19D(a) A cross-sectional view of the unit substrate 22 of the unit laminate 35 in the vicinity of the through hole 25 is shown enlarged. As shown in FIG. 19D(c), the wall surface 81d of the hole 81b of the first protective film 81 is positioned closer to the through hole 25 of the unit substrate 22 than the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit substrate 22. At the center side. Similarly, the wall surface 82d of the hole 82b of the second protective film 82 is positioned closer to the center side of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 than the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. The relationship between the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is the same as that of the side surface 22c described above, from the first surface of the unit substrate 22. The both of 22a and the second surface 22b are etched to form a through hole 25 in the unit base material 22, which is achieved.

(側面用補強部之形成工程) (Formation of the reinforcing part for the side)

接著,與上述之第1實施形態的情況相同地,亦可在被單位基材22之側面22c、第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82所包圍的空間內,填充塗布液27。藉由此,係能夠在單位層積體35的單位基材22之側面22c處設置側面用補強部26。 Then, in the same manner as in the case of the first embodiment described above, the coating liquid 27 may be filled in a space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82. Thereby, the side surface reinforcing portion 26 can be provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 of the unit laminated body 35.

(孔用補強部之形成工程) (Formation of the reinforcement for the hole)

接著,參考圖20A~圖20D,針對用以在單位層積體35之單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上設置孔用補強部28之工程作說明。 Next, a description will be given of a project for providing the hole reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 of the unit laminated body 35 with reference to FIGS. 20A to 20D.

首先,如同圖20A中所示一般,在第2保護 膜82上,配置在單位基材22之第2面22b側而從下方來將單位基材22之貫通孔25以及第2保護膜82的孔82b作密封的密封構件85。只要是能夠防止塗布液27之漏出,則係並不特別對構成密封構件85之材料作限定。例如,係可使用樹脂薄膜等來構成密封構件85。 First, as shown in Figure 20A, in the second protection The film 82 is disposed on the second surface 22b side of the unit base member 22, and the sealing member 85 that seals the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 and the hole 82b of the second protective film 82 from below. The material constituting the sealing member 85 is not particularly limited as long as it can prevent the leakage of the coating liquid 27. For example, the sealing member 85 can be formed using a resin film or the like.

接著,如圖20B中所示一般,實施將包含有 樹脂材料的塗布液27塗布在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上之孔用塗布工程。於此,係與上述之第1實施形態的情況相同,針對使用包含有丙烯酸系樹脂和光聚合起始劑之塗布液27的例子作說明。 Next, as shown in Figure 20B, the implementation will include The coating liquid 27 of the resin material is applied to the hole on the wall surface 25c of the through-hole 25 of the unit substrate 22 for coating work. Here, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, an example in which the coating liquid 27 containing an acrylic resin and a photopolymerization initiator is used will be described.

在孔用塗布工程中,塗布液27係被塗布在作 了密封的空間中。在本實施形態中,塗布液27,係被塗布在被密封構件85、第2保護膜82、貫通孔25之壁面25c以及第1保護膜81所包圍的空間內。較理想,塗布液27,係被塗布於被作了密封的空間內,直到塗布液27成為至少部分性地與第1保護膜81之底面81e(單位基材22側之面)相接為止。另外,雖並未圖示,但是,係亦可將塗布液27一直塗布為直到成為溢出於第1保護膜81上為止。於此情況,係亦可藉由將溢出於第1保護膜81上的塗布液27使用刮刀等來刮除,而對於之後所形成的孔用補強部28之上面進行平面整理。 In the coating process for holes, the coating liquid 27 is coated In the sealed space. In the present embodiment, the coating liquid 27 is applied to the space surrounded by the sealing member 85, the second protective film 82, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25, and the first protective film 81. Preferably, the coating liquid 27 is applied to the sealed space until the coating liquid 27 is at least partially in contact with the bottom surface 81e (surface on the unit base material 22 side) of the first protective film 81. Further, although not shown, the coating liquid 27 may be applied until it overflows on the first protective film 81. In this case, the coating liquid 27 overflowing the first protective film 81 can be scraped off using a doctor blade or the like, and the upper surface of the hole reinforcing portion 28 formed later can be planarly arranged.

之後,實施使被設置在單位基材22之貫通孔 25的壁面25c上之塗布液27硬化的孔用硬化工程。於 此,係藉由對於塗布液27照射紫外線等之光,來使塗布液27硬化。藉由此,如圖20B中所示一般,由在塗布液27中所包含之樹脂材料所成的孔用補強部28,係以將單位基材22之貫通孔25作閉塞的方式而被形成。 Thereafter, the through holes provided in the unit substrate 22 are implemented. The hole in which the coating liquid 27 on the wall surface 25c of 25 is hardened is hardened. to Thus, the coating liquid 27 is cured by irradiating the coating liquid 27 with light such as ultraviolet rays. As a result, as shown in FIG. 20B, the hole reinforcing portion 28 formed of the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27 is formed so as to close the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. .

接著,如圖20C中所示一般,實施對於孔用 補強部28進行加工並在孔用補強部28處形成貫通孔23之樹脂材料加工工程。只要是能夠在孔用補強部28處形成貫通孔23,則係並不特別對於對孔用補強部28進行加工之方法作限定。例如,係可適宜採用使用有鑽頭之機械加工或者是雷射加工等。另外,密封構件85,係可於在孔用補強部28處形成貫通孔23之前便先行除去,或者是,亦可於在孔用補強部28處形成了貫通孔23之後再除去。 Next, as shown in FIG. 20C, generally, for the hole The reinforcing portion 28 performs processing for forming a resin material in the through hole 23 at the hole reinforcing portion 28. As long as the through hole 23 can be formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28, the method of processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 is not particularly limited. For example, machining using a drill or laser processing can be suitably employed. Further, the sealing member 85 may be removed before the through hole 23 is formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28, or may be removed after the through hole 23 is formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28.

另外,在圖20C中,雖係針對以在第1保護 膜81之壁面81d上以及第2保護膜82之壁面82d上殘留有孔用補強部28的方式來對於孔用補強部28進行加工的例子作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此。例如,亦可如圖20D中所示一般,以在第1保護膜81之壁面81d上以及第2保護膜82之壁面82d上不會殘留有孔用補強部28的方式,來對於孔用補強部28進行加工。 In addition, in FIG. 20C, although it is directed to the first protection An example in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed to leave the hole reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 81d of the film 81 and the wall surface 82d of the second protective film 82 is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in FIG. 20D, the hole reinforcing portion 28 may not remain on the wall surface 81d of the first protective film 81 and the wall surface 82d of the second protective film 82, and the hole may be reinforced. The part 28 performs processing.

之後,將單位基材22之第1面22a上的第1 保護膜81以及單位基材22之第2面22b上的第2保護膜82除去。藉由此,如圖18中所示一般,係能夠得到在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上被設置有孔用補強部 28之覆蓋玻璃20。 Thereafter, the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 is the first The protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22 are removed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 18, it is possible to obtain a hole reinforcing portion provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. 28 covers glass 20.

若依據本實施形態,則係在單位基材22之貫 通孔25面的壁面25c上,設置有由硬化性樹脂所成之孔用補強部28。因此,在對於覆蓋玻璃20施加有衝擊的情況時所傳導至單位基材22之貫通孔25處的力,係藉由孔用補強部28而被舒緩,而能夠對於在貫通孔25之壁面25c處產生碎裂等之損傷的情形作抑制。藉由此,就算是當並未在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c處形成有壓縮應力層的情況時,亦能夠充分地提高覆蓋玻璃20之耐衝擊性。又,由於就算是當在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c處露出有拉張應力層24b的情況時,亦能夠藉由孔用補強部28來將露出了的拉張應力層24b作覆蓋,因此,係能夠充分地提高覆蓋玻璃20之耐衝擊性。 According to this embodiment, it is in the unit substrate 22 A hole reinforcing portion 28 made of a curable resin is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25. Therefore, when the impact is applied to the cover glass 20, the force transmitted to the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is relieved by the hole reinforcing portion 28, and can be applied to the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25. The situation in which damage such as chipping occurs is suppressed. As a result, even when a compressive stress layer is not formed on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be sufficiently improved. Further, even when the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed at the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22, the exposed tensile stress layer 24b can be used for the exposed tensile stress layer 24b. Covering, therefore, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be sufficiently improved.

又,在本實施形態中,用以構成孔用補強部 28之塗布液27,係以和從單位基材22之第1面22a而朝向貫通孔25之中心側突出的第1保護膜81之底面81e以及從單位基材22之第2面22b而朝向貫通孔25之中心側突出的第2保護膜82之底面82e的雙方相接的方式來作塗布。於此情況,孔用補強部28之面28a、28b的位置,係成為因應於與第1面22a、22b相接之保護膜81、82的底面81e、82e之位置而被制定。因此,如同圖20C以及圖20D中所示一般,在單位基材22之第1面22a和孔用補強部28之第1面28a之間,係完全或者是幾乎不存在有階差。同樣的,在單位基材22之第2面22b和孔用補 強部28之第2面28b之間,係完全或者是幾乎不存在有階差。故而,係能夠對於觀察者以視覺而辨識出單位基材22和孔用補強部28之間之邊界的情況作抑制。故而,若依據本實施形態之孔用補強部28,則係能夠同時達成覆蓋玻璃20之貫通孔23的強度之確保以及覆蓋玻璃20之設計性的確保。又,在使手指等之外部導體於覆蓋玻璃20上進行滑動時,係能夠對於外部導體被單位基材22和孔用補強部28之間之邊界所勾到的感覺作抑制。故而,係能夠對起因於階差而導致對於觸控面板之操作感有所阻礙的情形作抑制。又,係能夠對起因於階差而導致手指等之外部導體受傷的情形作抑制。 Further, in the present embodiment, the reinforcing portion for the hole is formed. The coating liquid 27 of 28 is oriented from the bottom surface 81e of the first protective film 81 protruding from the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 toward the center side of the through hole 25, and from the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22. The bottom surface 82e of the second protective film 82 protruding from the center side of the through hole 25 is applied in such a manner as to be in contact with each other. In this case, the positions of the faces 28a and 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are determined in accordance with the positions of the bottom faces 81e and 82e of the protective films 81 and 82 that are in contact with the first faces 22a and 22b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20C and FIG. 20D, there is a complete or almost no step difference between the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 28a of the hole reinforcing portion 28. Similarly, the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22 and the hole are filled. Between the second faces 28b of the strong portions 28, there is a complete or almost no step difference. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 from being visually recognized by the observer. Therefore, according to the hole reinforcing portion 28 of the present embodiment, the strength of the through hole 23 covering the glass 20 can be simultaneously ensured and the design of the cover glass 20 can be ensured. Moreover, when the outer conductor such as a finger is slid on the cover glass 20, the feeling that the outer conductor is hooked by the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the operational feeling of the touch panel is hindered due to the step difference. Further, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the outer conductor of the finger or the like is injured due to the step.

又,在本實施形態中,在將塗布液27塗布於 單位基材22之貫通孔25之壁面25c上時,係配置有在單位基材22之第2面22b側而從下方來將單位基材22之貫通孔25以及第2保護膜82的孔82b作密封的密封構件85。因此,係能夠防止塗布液27之漏出。 Further, in the present embodiment, the coating liquid 27 is applied to When the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is placed, the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 and the hole 82b of the second protective film 82 are disposed on the second surface 22b side of the unit base material 22 from below. A sealed sealing member 85. Therefore, leakage of the coating liquid 27 can be prevented.

又,在本實施形態中,覆蓋玻璃20之貫通孔 23,係為藉由對於由以將單位基材22之貫通孔25作閉塞的方式所設置之樹脂材料而成的孔用補強部28施加使用有鑽頭等之機械加工或者是雷射加工等所得到者。於此情況,貫通孔23之形狀的精確度,係因應於孔用補強部28之加工的精確度而被決定。又,對於由樹脂材料所成之孔用補強部28進行加工一事,相較於對於強化玻璃進行加工,係較為容易。因此,若依據本實施形態,則係能夠以 良好精確度來制定覆蓋玻璃20之貫通孔23的形狀。亦即是,相較於將貫通孔23之壁面23c藉由強化玻璃來構成的情況,係能夠容易地得到所期望之形狀的貫通孔23。 Moreover, in the present embodiment, the through hole of the cover glass 20 is covered. In the hole reinforcing portion 28 which is formed of a resin material which is closed by the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22, machining using a drill or the like or laser processing is applied. Get the winner. In this case, the accuracy of the shape of the through hole 23 is determined in accordance with the accuracy of the processing of the hole reinforcing portion 28. Further, it is easier to process the reinforced portion 28 made of a resin material than the tempered glass. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to The shape of the through hole 23 covering the glass 20 is determined with good precision. In other words, the through hole 23 having a desired shape can be easily obtained as compared with the case where the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 is formed of tempered glass.

又,若依據本實施形態,則藉由實施上述之 蝕刻工程,係能夠同時進行基材30之切斷和貫通孔25之形成。又,藉由利用相同之保護膜81、82來在塗布塗布液27的同時亦使塗布液27硬化,係能夠以良好效率來形成側面用補強部26以及孔用補強部28之雙方。因此,係能夠以更少的工程數來製造出可對於側面20c以及貫通孔23之雙方適當地作保護的覆蓋玻璃20。 Moreover, according to the embodiment, by performing the above In the etching process, the cutting of the substrate 30 and the formation of the through holes 25 can be simultaneously performed. By applying the coating liquid 27 and curing the coating liquid 27 by the same protective films 81 and 82, both the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be formed with good efficiency. Therefore, the cover glass 20 which can properly protect both the side surface 20c and the through-hole 23 can be manufactured with few engineering numbers.

另外,係可對於上述之第2實施形態而施加 各種變更。以下,一面參考圖面,一面針對數個變形例作說明。在以下之說明以及於以下說明所使用的圖面中,針對能夠與上述之第2實施形態相同地來構成的部份,係使用與對於在上述之第2實施形態中所對應的部份而使用之元件符號相同的元件符號,並省略重複之說明。又,當在上述之第2實施形態中所能夠得到的作用效果明顯為在變形例中也能夠得到者的情況時,係亦有將該說明省略的情形。 Further, it can be applied to the second embodiment described above. Various changes. Hereinafter, a plurality of modifications will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description and the drawings used in the following description, the portions that can be configured in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above are used in the portions corresponding to the second embodiment described above. The same component symbols are used, and the repeated description is omitted. Further, in the case where the effects obtained in the second embodiment described above are apparently obtained in the modified example, the description is omitted.

(第1變形例) (First Modification)

在上述之第2之本實施形態中,係針對在第2保護膜82處形成孔82b的例子作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,如圖21A中所示一般,係亦能夠以在第1保護膜 81處形成孔81b但是並不在第2保護膜82處形成孔的方式,來設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82。另外,雖並未圖示,但是,在圖21A所示之例中,於基材30上之各區劃間,亦係於第2保護膜82處形成有上述之間隙82a。 In the second embodiment described above, an example in which the hole 82b is formed in the second protective film 82 is shown. However, it is not limited thereto, and as shown in FIG. 21A, it is also possible to use the first protective film. The first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided in such a manner that the hole 81b is formed at 81, but the hole is not formed in the second protective film 82. Further, although not shown, in the example shown in FIG. 21A, the above-described gap 82a is formed in the second protective film 82 between the respective regions on the substrate 30.

針對將圖21A中所示之第1保護膜81以及第 2保護膜82作為抗蝕層並對於基材30進行濕蝕刻的情況作說明。於此情況,如圖21B中所示一般,於被形成貫通孔25的場所處,單位基材22係成為以第1保護膜81作為抗蝕層並從第1面22a側起被進行濕蝕刻。因此,如圖21B中所示一般,單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c,係與單位基材22之第1面22a相交,並且係隨著接近單位基材22之第2面22b側而朝向貫通孔25之中心側延展,之後與第2面22b相交。又,貫通孔25,係在單位基材22之第2面22b側,藉由第2保護膜82而被密封。 For the first protective film 81 and the first shown in FIG. 21A The case where the protective film 82 is used as a resist layer and the substrate 30 is wet-etched will be described. In this case, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the place where the through hole 25 is formed, the unit base member 22 is wet-etched from the first surface 22a side with the first protective film 81 as a resist layer. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21B, the wall surface 25c of the through-hole 25 of the unit base material 22 intersects the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22, and is closer to the second surface 22b side of the unit base material 22. On the other hand, it extends toward the center side of the through hole 25, and then intersects the second surface 22b. Further, the through hole 25 is sealed on the second surface 22b side of the unit base member 22 by the second protective film 82.

接著,參考圖22A~圖22C,針對用以在圖 21B中所示之單位層積體35之單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上設置孔用補強部28之工程作說明。首先,如圖22A中所示一般,實施將塗布液27塗布在被作了密封的空間內之孔用塗布工程。在本實施形態中,塗布液27,係被塗布在被第2保護膜82、貫通孔25之壁面25c以及第1保護膜81所包圍的空間內。 Next, referring to FIG. 22A to FIG. 22C, The construction of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 of the unit laminated body 35 shown in FIG. 21B. First, as shown in Fig. 22A, a coating process for applying a coating liquid 27 to a hole in a sealed space is carried out. In the present embodiment, the coating liquid 27 is applied to the space surrounded by the second protective film 82, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25, and the first protective film 81.

之後,與上述之第2實施形態的情況相同, 實施使塗布液27硬化並得到孔用補強部28的孔用硬化工 程。接著,如圖22B中所示一般,藉由對於孔用補強部28進行使用有鑽頭等的機械加工或者是雷射加工,來實施在孔用補強部28處形成貫通孔23之樹脂材料加工工程。接著,將單位基材22之第1面22a上的第1保護膜81以及單位基材22之第2面22b上的第2保護膜82除去。藉由此,如圖22C中所示一般,係能夠得到在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上被設置有孔用補強部28之覆蓋玻璃20。 After that, as in the case of the second embodiment described above, A hole hardener for hardening the coating liquid 27 to obtain the hole reinforcing portion 28 Cheng. Then, as shown in FIG. 22B, the resin material processing work for forming the through hole 23 in the hole reinforcing portion 28 by performing the machining or the laser processing using the drill or the like for the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed. . Next, the first protective film 81 on the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22 are removed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 22C, the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.

若依據本變形例,則被設置在單位基材22之 第2面22b上的第2保護膜82,係能夠發揮防止塗布液27之漏出的功用,亦即是能夠發揮上述之第2實施形態中的密封構件85之功用。故而,相較於上述之第2之本實施形態的情況,係能夠將設置密封構件85之工程和將密封構件85除去的工程等作削減。故而,係能夠藉由更少的工程數,來得到在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上被設置有孔用補強部28之覆蓋玻璃20。 According to the present modification, it is disposed on the unit substrate 22 The second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b can function to prevent the leakage of the coating liquid 27, that is, the function of the sealing member 85 in the second embodiment described above. Therefore, compared with the case of the second embodiment described above, the process of providing the sealing member 85 and the process of removing the sealing member 85 can be reduced. Therefore, the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained by a small number of projects.

又,若依據本變形例,則單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c,係具備有隨著從單位基材22之第1面22a側起接近第2面22b側而朝向貫通孔25之中心側延展的形狀。此種壁面25c之形狀,對於後述之第6變形例一般的使第1面28a側之端部28ae或者是第2面28b側之端部28be的其中一方被削去之孔用補強部28而言,係具有高度的適合性。 In addition, according to the present modification, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is provided so as to face the through hole 25 as it approaches the second surface 22b side from the first surface 22a side of the unit base material 22. The shape of the center side is extended. The shape of the wall surface 25c is a hole reinforcing portion 28 that is cut by one of the end portion 28ae on the first surface 28a side or the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side in the sixth modification to be described later. Words are highly suitable.

另外,在本變形例中,雖係針對在第1保護 膜81處形成孔81b但是並不在第2保護膜82處形成孔的例子作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此。雖並未圖示,但是,係亦能夠以在第2保護膜82處形成孔但是並不在第1保護膜81處形成孔的方式,來設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82。於此情況,單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c,係如同後述之圖29中所示一般,成為具備有隨著從單位基材22之第2面22b側起接近第1面22a側而朝向貫通孔25之中心側延展的形狀。 In addition, in the present modification, it is directed to the first protection. An example in which the hole 81b is formed in the film 81 but the hole is not formed in the second protective film 82 is shown, but it is not limited thereto. Though not shown, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 can be provided so that holes are formed in the second protective film 82 but holes are not formed in the first protective film 81. In this case, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is provided so as to be close to the first surface 22a side from the second surface 22b side of the unit base material 22 as shown in FIG. 29 which will be described later. The shape is extended toward the center side of the through hole 25.

(第2變形例) (Second modification)

在上述之第2實施形態中,係針對藉由將第1保護膜81或保護膜81、82作為抗蝕層並對於基材30或單位基材22進行濕蝕刻一事來形成貫通孔25的例子作了展示。 然而,用以在基材30或單位基材22形成貫通孔25之方法,係並不被限定於濕蝕刻。例如,係亦可藉由使用有鑽頭等之機械加工或者是雷射加工等,來在基材30或單位基材22處形成貫通孔25。圖23A,係為針對並不利用第1保護膜81或保護膜81、82地而藉由機械加工或雷射加工來形成了貫通孔25的單位基材22作展示之剖面圖。 In the second embodiment, the through hole 25 is formed by wet etching the base material 30 or the unit base material 22 by using the first protective film 81 or the protective films 81 and 82 as a resist layer. Made a show. However, the method for forming the through holes 25 in the substrate 30 or the unit substrate 22 is not limited to wet etching. For example, the through hole 25 may be formed in the base material 30 or the unit base material 22 by mechanical processing using a drill or the like or laser processing. 23A is a cross-sectional view showing a unit substrate 22 in which through holes 25 are formed by machining or laser processing without using the first protective film 81 or the protective films 81 and 82.

另外,當藉由機械加工或雷射加工等來形成 貫通孔25的情況時,係會有在貫通孔25之周圍處產生微碎裂的情形。於此情況,係亦可在形成了貫通孔25之後,對於貫通孔25之周圍進行濕蝕刻並將微碎裂除去。 In addition, when formed by machining or laser processing, etc. In the case of the through hole 25, there is a case where micro-cracking occurs around the through hole 25. In this case, after the through holes 25 are formed, the periphery of the through holes 25 may be wet-etched and the micro-cracks removed.

在本變形例中,於在單位基材22處形成了貫 通孔25之後,如同圖23B中所示一般,係在單位基材22之第2面22b上,設置將單位基材22之貫通孔25作密封的密封構件85。之後,如圖24A中所示一般,實施將塗布液27塗布在被作了密封的空間內之孔用塗布工程。 In the present modification, the formation is performed at the unit base material 22 After the through hole 25, as shown in FIG. 23B, a sealing member 85 for sealing the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22. Thereafter, as shown in Fig. 24A, a coating process for applying a coating liquid 27 to a hole in a sealed space is carried out.

此時,如同圖24A中所示一般,塗布液27, 係亦能夠以會溢出於單位基材22之第1面22a上的程度來作塗布。於此情況,係能夠成為並不需要進行將塗布液27使用刮刀等來刮除的工程或將被塗布液27所污染之第1面22a洗淨的工程等。較理想,塗布液27,係以至少會將在貫通孔25的壁面25c處所露出的拉張應力層24b作覆蓋的方式,來進行塗布。藉由此,係能夠藉由孔用補強部28來將在壁面25c處而露出了的拉張應力層24b作覆蓋,藉由此,係能夠更確實地保護貫通孔25。更理想,係如圖24A中所示一般,藉由作用於塗布液27處之表面張力,而以使單位基材22之第1面22a和塗布液27之表面會無階差地相互連接的方式來塗布塗布液27。藉由此,係能夠對於在由塗布液27所得到的孔用補強部28之第1面28a和單位基材22之第1面22a之間產生階差的情形作抑制。 At this time, as shown in FIG. 24A, the coating liquid 27, It is also possible to apply the coating to the extent that it overflows on the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22. In this case, it is not necessary to perform a process of scraping off the coating liquid 27 using a doctor blade or the like, or a process of washing the first surface 22a contaminated with the coating liquid 27, or the like. Preferably, the coating liquid 27 is applied so as to cover at least the tensile stress layer 24b exposed at the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25. By this, the tensile stress layer 24b exposed at the wall surface 25c can be covered by the hole reinforcing portion 28, whereby the through hole 25 can be more reliably protected. More preferably, as shown in Fig. 24A, the surface tension of the coating liquid 27 is applied so that the surfaces of the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 and the surface of the coating liquid 27 are connected to each other without a step. The coating liquid 27 is applied in a manner. By this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a step difference between the first surface 28a of the hole reinforcing portion 28 obtained by the coating liquid 27 and the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22.

或者是,雖並未圖示,但是,塗布液27,係亦能夠以會溢出於單位基材22之第1面22a上的程度來作塗布。於此情況,係將溢出於單位基材22之第1面22a上的塗布液27,使用刮刀等來刮除。藉由此,係能夠使塗布液27之表面的位置和單位基材22之第1面22a的位置 相互一致。 Alternatively, although not shown, the coating liquid 27 can be applied to such an extent that it overflows on the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22. In this case, the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 is scraped off using a doctor blade or the like. Thereby, the position of the surface of the coating liquid 27 and the position of the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 can be made. Consistent with each other.

之後,實施使塗布液27硬化並得到孔用補強 部28的孔用硬化工程。接著,實施對於孔用補強部28進行加工並在孔用補強部28處形成貫通孔23之樹脂材料加工工程。藉由此,如圖24B中所示一般,係能夠得到在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上被設置有孔用補強部28之覆蓋玻璃20。 Thereafter, the coating liquid 27 is hardened and the pores are reinforced. The hole of the portion 28 is hardened. Next, a resin material processing process in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed and the through hole 23 is formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24B, the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.

(第3變形例) (Third Modification)

在上述之第2變形例中,係針對藉由機械加工或雷射加工來在單位基材22或基材30處形成貫通孔25並且並不利用第1保護膜81或保護膜81、82地而將塗布液27塗布在貫通孔25之壁面25c上的例子作了展示。然而,係亦能夠在藉由機械加工或雷射加工來在單位基材22或基材30處形成貫通孔25的同時,進而與上述之本實施形態或第1變形例的情況相同地,利用第1保護膜81或保護膜81、82而將塗布液27作塗布並形成孔用補強部28。 In the second modification described above, the through holes 25 are formed in the unit base material 22 or the base material 30 by machining or laser processing, and the first protective film 81 or the protective films 81 and 82 are not used. An example in which the coating liquid 27 is applied to the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 is shown. However, it is also possible to form the through hole 25 in the unit base material 22 or the base material 30 by machining or laser processing, and to use the same as in the case of the above-described embodiment or the first modification. The coating liquid 27 is applied to the first protective film 81 or the protective films 81 and 82 to form a hole reinforcing portion 28.

例如,首先,係準備藉由機械加工或雷射加 工而形成了貫通孔25之單位基材22,接著,如同圖25A中所示一般,在單位基材22之第1面22a上以及第2面22b上,分別設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82。此時,在第1保護膜81中之與貫通孔25相對應的位置處,係被形成有孔81b。又,第1保護膜81之孔81b的壁面 81d,係位置在較單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c而更靠單位基材22之貫通孔25的中心側處。於此情況,較理想,係如圖25B中所示一般,塗布液27,係被塗布於被作了密封的空間內,直到塗布液27成為至少部分性地與第1保護膜81之底面81e相接為止。藉由此,如同圖25C中所示一般,係能夠形成具備有在與單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b之間並不存在有階差或者是幾乎不存在有階差的第1面28a以及第2面28b之孔用補強部28。 For example, first, the system is prepared by machining or laser addition. The unit base material 22 of the through hole 25 is formed, and then, as shown in FIG. 25A, the first protective film 81 and the first surface are respectively provided on the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and the second surface 22b. 2 protective film 82. At this time, a hole 81b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 25 in the first protective film 81. Further, the wall surface of the hole 81b of the first protective film 81 81d is located closer to the center side of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 than the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. In this case, it is preferable that the coating liquid 27 is applied to the sealed space until the coating liquid 27 becomes at least partially and the bottom surface 81e of the first protective film 81, as shown in Fig. 25B. Until then. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25C, it is possible to form a step having no step difference or almost no step difference between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22. The reinforcing portion 28 for the holes of the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b.

(第4變形例) (Fourth Modification)

在上述之第2實施形態以及各變形例中,係針對在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c處而拉張應力層24b有所露出的例子作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,如圖26中所示一般,單位基材22之貫通孔25之壁面25c,係亦可藉由壓縮應力層24a來構成。就算是於此情況,亦同樣的,為了將在對於覆蓋玻璃20而施加有衝擊的情況時所傳導至單位基材22之貫通孔25處的力作舒緩,與上述之第2實施形態以及各變形例的情況相同,在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上設置孔用補強部28一事,係為有效。 In the second embodiment and the modifications described above, an example in which the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed at the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is shown. However, it is not limited thereto, and as shown in Fig. 26, the wall surface 25c of the through-hole 25 of the unit base material 22 may be constituted by the compressive stress layer 24a. Even in this case, in order to relieve the force transmitted to the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 when an impact is applied to the cover glass 20, the second embodiment and each of the above-described modifications are also provided. In the same manner as the example, it is effective to provide the hole reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22.

(第5變形例) (Fifth Modification)

在上述之第2實施形態中,係針對單位基材22之貫 通孔25的壁面25c為具備有朝向單位基材22之貫通孔25之中心側而突出的凸形狀之例子作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,如圖27中所示一般,貫通孔25之壁面25c,係亦可具備有朝向與貫通孔25之中心相反側而凹陷了的凹形狀。就算是於此情況,亦同樣的,藉由與上述之第2實施形態的情況相同地來在貫通孔25的壁面25c上形成孔用補強部28,係能夠適當地保護貫通孔25。 In the second embodiment described above, it is directed to the unit substrate 22 The wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 is shown as an example of a convex shape that protrudes toward the center side of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. However, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 may have a concave shape that is recessed toward the side opposite to the center of the through hole 25, as shown in FIG. In the same manner as in the case of the second embodiment described above, the hole reinforcing portion 28 is formed in the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25, and the through hole 25 can be appropriately protected.

(第6變形例) (Sixth Modification)

在上述之第2實施形態以及各變形例中,係亦可在藉由使塗布液27硬化一事而得到孔用補強部28之後,藉由對於孔用補強部28之側面28c進行加工,而對於孔用補強部28之側面28c之形狀、亦即是對於覆蓋玻璃20之貫通孔23之壁面23c之形狀作整理。藉由此,係能夠使貫通孔23之美觀程度更為提昇。於此,孔用補強部28,由於係如同上述一般為藉由樹脂材料所構成,因此,相較於將覆蓋玻璃20之貫通孔23的壁面23c藉由強化玻璃來構成的情況,對於覆蓋玻璃20之貫通孔23的壁面23c進行加工並得到所期望之形狀一事係變得更為容易。又,亦難以發生起因於加工所導致的強度降低或者是微碎裂的發生作為加工方法,例如係可採用使用有研磨機之加工。 In the second embodiment and the modifications described above, the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be obtained by curing the coating liquid 27, and then the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be processed. The shape of the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28, that is, the shape of the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 covering the glass 20 is arranged. Thereby, the aesthetics of the through hole 23 can be further improved. Here, since the hole reinforcing portion 28 is generally made of a resin material as described above, the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 covering the glass 20 is formed of tempered glass, and the cover glass is used. It becomes easier to process the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 of 20 and obtain a desired shape. Further, it is also difficult to cause a decrease in strength or a microcracking due to processing as a processing method, and for example, a processing using a grinder can be employed.

例如,如圖28中所示一般,亦能夠以將孔用 補強部28之第1面28a側的端部28ae以及第2面28b側的端部28be之雙方削去的方式,來對於孔用補強部28之 側面28c進行加工。在圖28所示之例中,孔用補強部28之側面28c中的與第1面28a相交的部份以及與第2面28b相交的部份之雙方,係被加工成圓角面。另外,在圖28中,雖係針對以使側面28c成為圓角面的方式來對於側面28c進行加工的例子作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此,雖並未圖示,但是,亦能夠以使側面28c成為角面的方式來對於側面28c進行加工。 For example, as shown in FIG. 28, it is also possible to use holes. The end portion 28ae on the first surface 28a side of the reinforcing portion 28 and the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side are cut away, and the reinforcing portion 28 for the hole is used. The side surface 28c is processed. In the example shown in Fig. 28, both the portion of the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 that intersects the first surface 28a and the portion that intersects the second surface 28b are processed into rounded surfaces. In addition, although FIG. 28 shows an example in which the side surface 28c is processed so that the side surface 28c becomes a rounded surface, it is not limited to this, but it is not shown, but it is not shown in figure. It is also possible to process the side surface 28c so that the side surface 28c becomes an angular surface.

除此之外,如圖29中所示一般,亦能夠以將 孔用補強部28之第1面28a側的端部28ae以及第2面28b側的端部28be中之其中一方、例如至少將第2面28b側之端部28be削去的方式,來對於孔用補強部28之側面28c進行加工。在圖29所示之例中,孔用補強部28之側面28c中的與第2面28b相交之部份,係被加工成圓角面。又,關於被設置在單位基材22之側面22c上的側面用補強部26,係亦可施加同樣的圓角面加工。於此情況,係能夠對於覆蓋玻璃20之第2面20b側賦予如同涵蓋廣區域地而帶有圓潤形狀一般之印象。 In addition to this, as shown in FIG. 29, it is also possible to One of the end portion 28ae on the first surface 28a side and the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side of the hole reinforcing portion 28, for example, at least the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side is cut away. Processing is performed by the side surface 28c of the reinforcing portion 28. In the example shown in Fig. 29, the portion of the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 that intersects the second surface 28b is processed into a rounded surface. Further, the side reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 may be subjected to the same fillet surface processing. In this case, it is possible to impart an impression that the second surface 20b side of the cover glass 20 has a rounded shape as if it covers a wide area.

(第7變形例) (Seventh Modification)

在上述之第2實施形態以及各變形例中,係針對於藉由被設置在單位基材22之第2面22b上的第2保護膜82或者是密封構件85所密封了的空間內而塗布有塗布液27之例作了展示。然而,當使用具備高黏性之塗布液27的情況時,係亦可並不形成此種被作了密封的空間地而將塗 布液27塗布在單位基材22之貫通孔25的壁面25c上。 例如,如圖30中所示一般,亦可在以使貫通孔25朝向上下方向延伸的方式而將單位層積體35作了保持的狀態下,在被貫通孔25的壁面25c、第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82所包圍的空間內塗布塗布液27。或者是,亦可如同圖31中所示一般,並不設置第1保護膜81和第2保護膜82地,而在貫通孔25之壁面25c上塗布塗布液27。就算是於此些情況中,亦同樣的,由於只要塗布液27為具備有充分的黏性,塗布液27便會停留在貫通孔25的壁面25c上,因此,係能夠在壁面25c上形成孔用補強部28。 In the second embodiment and the modifications described above, the second protective film 82 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 or the space sealed by the sealing member 85 is applied. An example of the coating liquid 27 is shown. However, when a coating liquid 27 having a high viscosity is used, it may be coated without forming such a sealed space. The cloth liquid 27 is applied onto the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the unit laminate 35 may be held in a state in which the through hole 25 is extended in the vertical direction, and the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 and the first protection may be used. The coating liquid 27 is applied to the space surrounded by the film 81 and the second protective film 82. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31, the coating liquid 27 may be applied to the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 without providing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82. In the same manner, in the case where the coating liquid 27 is sufficiently viscous, the coating liquid 27 stays on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25, so that a hole can be formed in the wall surface 25c. The reinforcing portion 28 is used.

又,若依據本變形例,則係能夠以並不將單 位基材22之貫通孔25作閉塞的方式,來在壁面25c上塗布塗布液27。因此,係能夠並不實施上述之樹脂材料加工工程地而得到被形成有貫通孔23之孔用補強部28。 Moreover, according to the present modification, it is possible to The coating liquid 27 is applied to the wall surface 25c so that the through hole 25 of the base material 22 is closed. Therefore, the hole reinforcing portion 28 in which the through hole 23 is formed can be obtained without performing the resin material processing described above.

在本變形例中所使用之塗布液27的黏度,係 設定為能夠在直到塗布液27硬化為止均使塗布液27停留在壁面25c上之程度。例如,塗布液27之黏度,係成為20~50Pa.s之範圍內。 The viscosity of the coating liquid 27 used in the present modification is The coating liquid 27 is allowed to stay on the wall surface 25c until the coating liquid 27 is hardened. For example, the viscosity of the coating liquid 27 is 20 to 50 Pa. Within the scope of s.

(第8變形例) (eighth modification)

在本變形例中,係針對覆蓋玻璃20係構成為除了保護顯示裝置15之功能以外亦可發揮有觸控面板之功能者的例子來作說明。具體而言,在覆蓋玻璃20之顯示裝置 15側的第1面20a上,係與上述之第1實施形態之情況相同的,被設置有觸控面板感測部40,該觸控面板感測部40,係包含有用以檢測出外部導體之接近或接觸的感測電極。又,在覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a的非主動區域Aa2處,係亦可更進而設置有用以呈現所期望之顏色的裝飾部60。圖32,係為針對被設置在覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a處的觸控面板感測部40作展示之圖。另外,在圖32中,為了方便說明,係將裝飾部60省略。 In the present modification, an example in which the cover glass 20 is configured to function as a touch panel in addition to the function of protecting the display device 15 will be described. Specifically, the display device covering the glass 20 The first surface 20a on the 15 side is provided with a touch panel sensing unit 40, which is useful for detecting an external conductor, as in the case of the first embodiment described above. Sensing electrodes that are close to or in contact. Further, at the inactive area Aa2 of the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20, a decorative portion 60 useful for presenting a desired color may be further provided. FIG. 32 is a view showing the touch panel sensing portion 40 provided on the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20. In addition, in FIG. 32, the decoration part 60 is abbreviate|omitted for convenience of description.

以下,參考圖32,針對被設置在覆蓋玻璃20 之第1面20a處的觸控面板感測部40作說明。圖32,係為對於從第1面20a側來對於覆蓋玻璃20作了觀察的情況作展示之平面圖。另外,在圖32中,為了方便說明,係將裝飾部60省略。觸控面板感測部40之構成,由於係與上述之第1實施形態中的觸控面板感測部40之構成相同,因此係省略詳細之說明。 Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 32, for being disposed on the cover glass 20 The touch panel sensing unit 40 at the first surface 20a will be described. Fig. 32 is a plan view showing a case where the cover glass 20 is observed from the side of the first surface 20a. In addition, in FIG. 32, the decoration part 60 is abbreviate|omitted for convenience of description. Since the configuration of the touch panel sensing unit 40 is the same as that of the touch panel sensing unit 40 in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

接著,參考圖33以及圖34,針對被設置在覆 蓋玻璃20之第1面20a處的裝飾部60作說明。圖33以及圖34,係分別為圖32中所示之覆蓋玻璃20的沿著線XXXIII以及線XXXIV之剖面圖。 Next, referring to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, The decorative portion 60 at the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 will be described. 33 and 34 are cross-sectional views along line XXXIII and line XXXIV of the cover glass 20 shown in Fig. 32, respectively.

如圖33以及圖34中所示一般,在非主動區 域Aa2處,裝飾部60,係以位置在相較於導出配線43而更靠觀察者側的方式而被作配置。於此情況,裝飾部60,係成為從觀察者側起隔著覆蓋玻璃20而被作視覺辨認。亦即是,在附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置10中,非主動區 域Aa2之外觀,係成為被裝飾部60及其周邊之構成要素所決定。 As shown in Figure 33 and Figure 34, in the inactive area In the field Aa2, the decorative portion 60 is disposed such that the position is closer to the observer than the lead-out wiring 43. In this case, the decorative portion 60 is visually recognized from the observer side via the cover glass 20. That is, in the display device 10 with the cover glass, the inactive area The appearance of the field Aa2 is determined by the components of the decorative portion 60 and its surroundings.

裝飾部60之顏色,係與上述之第1實施形態 的情況相同,為因應於對附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置10所要求的設計感而被作選擇。另外,如圖34中所示一般,在裝飾部60中之與貫通孔23相重疊的位置處,係被形成有孔61。 The color of the decorative portion 60 is the same as the first embodiment described above. The same is true, and is selected in response to the design sense required for the display device 10 with a cover glass. Further, as shown in FIG. 34, generally, a hole 61 is formed at a position overlapping the through hole 23 in the decorative portion 60.

另外,在圖34中,裝飾部60,雖係針對以當 沿著覆蓋玻璃20之法線方向來作觀察的情況時會與側面用補強部26以及孔用補強部28相互重疊的方式而被設置的例子作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此。例如,如圖35中所示一般,裝飾部60,係亦能夠以當沿著覆蓋玻璃20之法線方向來作觀察的情況時不會與側面用補強部26以及孔用補強部28相互重疊的方式而被設置。又,雖並未圖示,但是,側面用補強部26以及孔用補強部28,係亦可當沿著覆蓋玻璃20之法線方向來作觀察的情況時會與裝飾部60僅作部分性的重疊。 In addition, in FIG. 34, the decorative part 60 is directed to When the observation is performed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20, the example in which the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 are overlapped with each other is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. . For example, as shown in FIG. 35, the decorative portion 60 can also be overlapped with the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20. The way is set. Further, although not shown, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be partially formed only with the decorative portion 60 when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20. The overlap.

在本變形例中,於覆蓋玻璃20之製造工程 中,係實施形成裝飾部60和觸控面板感測部40等之要素部70的要素部形成工程。關於實施要素部形成工程之時序,係並未特別限定,而可考慮有各種的形態。 In the present modification, the manufacturing process of the cover glass 20 In the middle, the element portion forming part of the element portion 70 such as the decorative portion 60 and the touch panel sensing portion 40 is formed. The timing of the implementation of the component portion forming process is not particularly limited, and various forms can be considered.

例如,係亦可先行於在基材30上設置第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82的上述之保護膜形成工程,而先實施要素部形成工程。於此情況,第1保護膜81,在進行蝕 刻工程時,係成為不僅是發揮對於基材30之第1面30a作保護的功用,而亦發揮對於被設置在基材30之第1面30a上的要素部70作保護之功用。 For example, it is also possible to perform the above-described protective film forming process in which the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided on the substrate 30, and the element portion forming process is performed first. In this case, the first protective film 81 is etched. In the engraving process, not only the function of protecting the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 but also the function of protecting the element portion 70 provided on the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 is exhibited.

或者是,亦能夠在將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82作為抗蝕層並對於基材30進行濕蝕刻而得到了單位基材22之後,再實施在單位基材22之第1面22a上設置要素部70之要素部形成工程。於此情況,為了形成側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28而將塗布液27作塗布之工程等,係可先行於要素部形成工程之前而先實施,亦可在要素部形成工程之後再實施。 Alternatively, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be used as a resist layer, and the base material 22 may be obtained by wet etching the base material 30, and then the first surface of the unit base material 22 may be applied. The element portion forming process of the element portion 70 is provided on the 22a. In this case, the coating liquid 27 may be applied to form the side surface reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28, and may be performed before the element portion forming process, or after the element portion forming process. Implementation.

較理想,側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28, 係構成為會呈現與裝飾部60相同之顏色。例如,側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28,係亦可包含有與在裝飾部60中所包含的著色顏料相同顏色之著色顏料。於此情況,側面用補強部26以及孔用補強部28中之當從覆蓋玻璃20之法線方向來作觀察時並未與裝飾部60相互重疊之區域,會作為與裝飾部60相同顏色之區域而被視覺辨認出來。因此,係能夠將可產生設計上之效果的區域擴大。 Preferably, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28, It is configured to present the same color as the decorative portion 60. For example, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may include a coloring pigment of the same color as the coloring pigment contained in the decorative portion 60. In this case, the region between the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 that does not overlap the decorative portion 60 when viewed from the normal direction of the cover glass 20 is the same color as the decorative portion 60. The area is visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to expand the area where the design effect can be produced.

一般而言,裝飾部60,係藉由將包含有樹脂材料以及顏料之塗布液塗布在單位基材22上,而形成之。另一方面,想要將塗布液正確地塗布在單位基材22之側面22c的近旁和貫通孔25之壁面25c的近旁一事,係並非容易。 In general, the decorative portion 60 is formed by applying a coating liquid containing a resin material and a pigment onto the unit base material 22. On the other hand, it is not easy to apply the coating liquid correctly in the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25.

於此,當側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28為如同上 述一般地而被著色的情況時,並不需要將裝飾部60設置在單位基材22之側面22c近旁和貫通孔25之壁面25c近旁,便能夠使單位基材22之側面22c近旁和貫通孔25之壁面25c近旁的區域產生設計上之效果。因此,係能夠使對於設置裝飾部60之工程所要求的難易度有所降低。 Here, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 are as above. In the case of being generally colored, it is not necessary to provide the decorative portion 60 in the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25, so that the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 can be adjacent to the through hole. The area near the wall 25c of 25 produces a design effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difficulty required for the construction of the decorative portion 60.

另外,在上述之本變形例中,係針對觸控面 板感測部40和裝飾部60之雙方均為被包含於覆蓋玻璃20中的例子作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此。例如,雖並未圖示,但是,覆蓋玻璃20,係亦可雖然包含有觸控面板感測部40但是並不包含有裝飾部60。或者是,覆蓋玻璃20,係亦可雖然包含有裝飾部60但是並不包含有觸控面板感測部40。 In addition, in the above-described modification, the touch surface is Both of the plate sensing portion 40 and the decorative portion 60 are shown as being included in the cover glass 20, but are not limited thereto. For example, although not shown, the cover glass 20 may include the touch panel sensing unit 40 but does not include the decorative portion 60. Alternatively, the cover glass 20 may include the decorative portion 60 but does not include the touch panel sensing portion 40.

又,在上述之本變形例中,雖係針對側面用 補強部26和孔用補強部28之顏色為與裝飾部60之顏色相同的例子來作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此,側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28,係亦可構成為會呈現與裝飾部60相異之顏色。又,當並未設置裝飾部60的情況時,側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28,係亦可構成為會呈現特定之顏色。於此情況,就算是並不設置裝飾部60,亦能夠藉由側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28,而實現像是漏光之防止等的設計性之提升。 Moreover, in the above-described modification, it is for the side surface. The color of the reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 is the same as the color of the decorative portion 60. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 are also It may be configured to present a color different from the decorative portion 60. Further, when the decorative portion 60 is not provided, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be configured to have a specific color. In this case, even if the decorative portion 60 is not provided, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be used to improve the design such as prevention of light leakage.

又,在上述之本變形例和上述之第1實施形 態中,作為觸控面板感測部40之感測電極41、42的圖案,係針對採用了所謂的鑽石圖案的例子作了展示,但 是,係並不被限定於此。只要是能夠以所期望之感度以及解析度來檢測出觸碰位置,則係可採用由各種形態之圖案所成的感測電極41、42。 Further, in the above-described modification and the first embodiment described above In the state, the pattern of the sensing electrodes 41, 42 as the touch panel sensing portion 40 is shown for an example using a so-called diamond pattern, but Yes, the system is not limited to this. The sensing electrodes 41 and 42 formed of patterns of various forms can be used as long as the touch position can be detected with the desired sensitivity and resolution.

又,在上述之本變形例和上述之第1實施形 態中,作為構成觸控面板感測部40之感測電極41、42的材料,係針對使用了具有透光性之透明導電性材料的例子作了展示,但是,係並不被限定於此。例如,作為感測電極41、42,係亦可採用由將銀合金或銅等之非透過性之導電性材料配置成網眼狀的金屬細線所成之所謂的網格感測形態者。 Further, in the above-described modification and the first embodiment described above In the state, the material of the sensing electrodes 41 and 42 constituting the touch panel sensing unit 40 is shown as an example in which a transparent conductive material having light transmissivity is used. However, the material is not limited thereto. . For example, as the sensing electrodes 41 and 42, a so-called mesh sensing pattern formed by disposing a non-transmissive conductive material such as a silver alloy or copper into a mesh-like metal thin wire may be used.

(第9變形例) (Ninth Modification)

在上述之第2實施形態以及各變形例中,係針對於將單位基材22之貫通孔25在第2面22b側處而藉由第2保護膜82或者是密封構件85所密封了的狀態下,在被作了密封的空間內而塗布有塗布液27之例作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,只要能夠在直到塗布液27硬化為止均使塗布液27停留在貫通孔25之壁面25c上,則係並不需要將貫通孔25在第2面22b側而堅牢地密封。例如,從第1面22a側而被作了塗布的塗布液27m,係亦可通過貫通孔25而從第2面22b側漏出。另外,當會起因於塗布液27而使單位基材22之第2面22b被污染的情況時,係亦可在形成孔用補強部28之後,對於第2面22b進行洗淨。若是對於防止第2面22b被污染一事作考慮,則較 理想,貫通孔25係在第2面22b側而被堅牢地密封。 In the second embodiment and the modified examples described above, the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is sealed by the second protective film 82 or the sealing member 85 on the side of the second surface 22b. Next, an example in which the coating liquid 27 is applied in a sealed space is shown. However, the coating liquid 27 is allowed to stay on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 until the coating liquid 27 is hardened, so that the through hole 25 does not need to be on the second surface 22b side. Firmly sealed. For example, the coating liquid 27m applied from the side of the first surface 22a may leak from the second surface 22b side through the through hole 25. In addition, when the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 is contaminated by the coating liquid 27, the second surface 22b may be washed after the hole reinforcing portion 28 is formed. If it is considered to prevent the second surface 22b from being contaminated, Preferably, the through hole 25 is firmly sealed on the side of the second surface 22b.

(第10變形例) (10th modification)

在上述之第2實施形態以及各變形例中,係針對在實施了對於孔用補強部28進行加工並形成貫通孔23的樹脂材料加工工程之後,再將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82除去的例子作了展示。然而,係並不被限定於此,亦可在實施樹脂材料加工工程之前,便將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82除去。另外,若是對於保護單位基材22之第1面22a以及第2面22b免於受到當對於孔用補強部28進行加工並形成貫通孔23時所產生的削屑等之污染一事作考慮,則可以說,較理想,係在實施了樹脂材料加工工程之後,再將第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82除去。 In the second embodiment and the modified examples described above, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film are further processed after the resin material processing process in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed and the through hole 23 is formed. An example of 82 removal is shown. However, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed before the resin material processing work is performed. In addition, when the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the protective unit base material 22 are protected from contamination by shavings or the like which are generated when the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed and the through hole 23 is formed, It can be said that it is preferable to remove the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 after performing the resin material processing work.

(第11變形例) (11th modification)

在上述之各實施形態以及各變形例中,側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28,係亦可構成為能夠對於覆蓋玻璃20帶電的情形作抑制。例如,側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28,係亦可包含有導電性粒子。藉由此,係能夠對於側面用補強部26、孔用補強部28以及單位基材22帶電的情形作抑制,藉由此,係能夠對於產生靜電破壞的情形作抑制。作為被添加在側面用補強部26和孔用補強部28中之導電性粒子,例如係可列舉出由碳黑所成之粒子。導電性粒子,較理想,係以使側面用補強部26和孔用補強 部28之表面電阻會成為105~108Ω/□之範圍內的方式來作添加。 In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be configured to be capable of suppressing charging of the cover glass 20. For example, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may contain conductive particles. By this, it is possible to suppress the charging of the side reinforcing portion 26, the hole reinforcing portion 28, and the unit base member 22, whereby the occurrence of electrostatic breakdown can be suppressed. The conductive particles to be added to the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 include, for example, particles made of carbon black. The conductive particles are preferably added so that the surface resistance of the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 is in the range of 10 5 to 10 8 Ω/□.

(第12變形例) (12th modification)

在上述之各實施形態以及各變形例中,為了將塗布液27之硬化時的收縮量變小,係亦可在塗布液27所包含之樹脂材料中添加填料(filler)。由於相較於樹脂材料,填料之起因於熱所導致的收縮程度為較小,因此,藉由添加填料,係能夠使當塗布液27硬化並成為側面用補強部26或孔用補強部28時的全體性之收縮的程度變小。作為填料,係可列舉出碳黑之粒子等。另外,若是添加填料,則可以推測到,起因於光被填料所遮蔽一事,會有光硬化性樹脂之聚合反應被阻礙並導致硬化無法充分地進行。考慮到此種問題,係亦可更進而在塗布液27所包含之樹脂材料中添加熱硬化性樹脂。 In each of the above-described embodiments and the modifications, in order to reduce the amount of shrinkage during curing of the coating liquid 27, a filler may be added to the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27. Since the degree of shrinkage due to heat is small compared to the resin material, the filler can be used to cure the coating liquid 27 to become the side reinforcing portion 26 or the hole reinforcing portion 28. The degree of contraction of the whole nature becomes smaller. Examples of the filler include particles of carbon black and the like. In addition, when the filler is added, it is presumed that the light is blocked by the filler, and the polymerization reaction of the photocurable resin is inhibited, and the hardening cannot be sufficiently performed. In consideration of such a problem, a thermosetting resin may be further added to the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27.

(第13變形例) (13th modification)

在上述之各實施形態以及各變形例中,係針對藉由隔著黏著層來將二軸延展聚丙烯或無延展聚丙烯之薄片貼附在基材30上而構成保護膜81、82的例子作了展示。然而,保護膜81、82之形成方法,係並未特別作限定。例如,亦可藉由在基材30之第1面30a上以及第2面30b上分別貼合感光性光阻薄膜,之後,對於感光性光阻薄膜,而使用光罩等來因應於所期望之形狀而照射紫外線等 之光,再藉由酸性液或鹼性液或者是有機溶劑等之顯像液來進行圖案化,而在基材30處設置保護膜81、82。 In each of the above-described embodiments and the modifications, the protective film 81 and 82 are formed by attaching a sheet of biaxially stretched polypropylene or non-stretched polypropylene to the substrate 30 via an adhesive layer. Made a show. However, the method of forming the protective films 81 and 82 is not particularly limited. For example, a photosensitive photoresist film may be bonded to the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 and the second surface 30b, respectively, and then a photosensitive mask or the like may be used for the photosensitive photoresist film to meet expectations. The shape is irradiated with ultraviolet rays, etc. The light is patterned by an imaging solution such as an acidic liquid or an alkaline liquid or an organic solvent, and protective films 81 and 82 are provided on the substrate 30.

另外,雖係針對上述之各實施形態而對於數 個的變形例作了說明,但是,當然的,係亦可將複數之變形例適宜作組合並適用之。 In addition, it is numerical for each of the above embodiments. Modifications have been made, but of course, a plurality of modifications may be suitably combined and applied.

[實施例] [Examples]

接著,根據實施例來對本發明作更進一步之具體性說明,但是,本發明,在不超出其之要旨的範圍內,係並不被以下之實施例的記載所限定。 The present invention will be further described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, but the invention is not limited by the description of the embodiments below.

(實施例1) (Example 1)

使用在上述之圖7A~圖7D中所示的方法,而在單位基材22之側面22c上形成了補強部26。作為構成補強部26之材料,係使用了丙烯酸系樹脂、環氧系樹脂以及聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂之3種類。作為丙烯酸系樹脂,係使用了東亞合成股份有限公司製之UV-3300。作為環氧系樹脂,係使用了股份有限公司THREEBOND製之TB3114。又,作為聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,係使用了積水化學工業股份有限公司製之PHOTOLEC A-784。 The reinforcing portion 26 is formed on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 by the method shown in Figs. 7A to 7D described above. As the material constituting the reinforcing portion 26, three types of acrylic resin, epoxy resin, and polyene-polythiol resin are used. As the acrylic resin, UV-3300 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. was used. As the epoxy resin, TB3114 manufactured by THREEBOND Co., Ltd. was used. Further, as the polyene-polythiol-based resin, PHOTOLEC A-784 manufactured by Sekisui Chemical Co., Ltd. was used.

首先,係準備3個的被設置有第1保護膜81以及第2保護膜82之單位基材22。作為單位基材22,係使用在板厚0.7mm之鋁矽酸鹽玻璃的表面上藉由化學強化而賦予了厚度24μm之壓縮應力層者。接著,如同上 述之圖7A中所示一般,在單位基材22之側面22c上,分別塗布包含有上述之3種類的樹脂之其中一者的塗布液27。之後,藉由對於塗布液27照射光,來使塗布液27硬化,並藉由此而得到了補強部26。另外,作為塗布液27之黏度、以及使塗布液27硬化之條件,係採用了提供在塗布液27中所包含之樹脂材料的材料廠商所推薦之條件。 First, three unit substrates 22 provided with the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are prepared. As the unit base material 22, a compressive stress layer having a thickness of 24 μm was applied by chemical strengthening on the surface of the aluminosilicate glass having a thickness of 0.7 mm. Then, like on As shown in FIG. 7A, generally, a coating liquid 27 containing one of the above three types of resins is applied to the side surface 22c of the unit substrate 22. Thereafter, the coating liquid 27 is irradiated with light to cure the coating liquid 27, whereby the reinforcing portion 26 is obtained. In addition, as the viscosity of the coating liquid 27 and the conditions for curing the coating liquid 27, conditions recommended by a material manufacturer that supplies the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27 are employed.

以手來觸摸所得到的補強部26之側面26c, 而對於是否感到會黏手一事作了評價。其結果,關於由環氧系樹脂以及聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂所構成的補強部26,係並未感到會黏手。另一方面,關於由丙烯酸系樹脂所構成的補強部26,則感到會黏手。 Touching the side surface 26c of the obtained reinforcing portion 26 with a hand, And commented on whether you feel that you will stick to it. As a result, the reinforcing portion 26 composed of the epoxy resin and the polyolefin-polythiol resin did not feel sticky. On the other hand, the reinforcing portion 26 made of an acrylic resin feels sticky.

補強部26之側面26c,係身為在硬化時會相 對於大氣等之外部環境而有所露出的部分。因此,在使用丙烯酸系樹脂的情況時,可以推測到,聚合反應會被氧所阻礙,其結果,補強部26之側面26c會以尚未硬化的狀態而有所殘留。另一方面,聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂之聚合反應的被氧所阻礙之程度,相較於丙烯酸系樹脂的情況係為小。因此,可以推測到,在由聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂所構成的補強部26中,係能夠防止其之側面26c產生黏性。 The side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is configured to be phased when hardened A part that is exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere. Therefore, when an acrylic resin is used, it is presumed that the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 remains in a state in which it has not been cured. On the other hand, the degree of inhibition by oxygen in the polymerization reaction of the polyolefin-polythiol-based resin is smaller than that in the case of the acrylic resin. Therefore, it is presumed that the reinforcing portion 26 composed of the polyolefin-polythiol resin can prevent the side surface 26c from being sticky.

(實施例2) (Example 2)

使用實施例1,針對上述之3種類的樹脂之印刷適合性作了評價。具體而言,首先,係如圖36(a)中所示一 般,準備了玻璃板90。接著,如同圖36(b)中所示一般,在玻璃板90上,塗布包含有上述之3種類的樹脂之其中一者的塗布液,之後,使塗布液硬化,並藉由此而在玻璃板90上形成了樹脂層91。接著,如同圖36(c)中所示一般,將以會分別具備有相異之表面張力的方式而作了設定的複數種類之墨水印刷在樹脂層91上,並藉由此而在樹脂層91上設置了印刷圖案92a~92f。於此,係將印刷圖案92a~92f,分別藉由具備有32、34、36、38、40、42mN/m之表面張力的墨水來構成之。作為用以將此種墨水印刷在樹脂層91上之手段,係使用了Corona Supplies Ltd.製之「JUMBO SURFACE TENSION TEST PENS」的#32、34、36、38、40、42之組。#之後的數字,係代表在筆中所包含的墨水之表面張力(單位為mN/m)。 Using Example 1, the printing suitability of the above three types of resins was evaluated. Specifically, first, as shown in Figure 36 (a) In general, a glass plate 90 is prepared. Next, as shown in FIG. 36(b), a coating liquid containing one of the above three types of resins is applied onto the glass plate 90, and then the coating liquid is hardened, and thereby the glass is thereby A resin layer 91 is formed on the board 90. Next, as shown in Fig. 36 (c), a plurality of kinds of inks which are set to have different surface tensions are printed on the resin layer 91, thereby being on the resin layer. Print patterns 92a to 92f are provided on 91. Here, the printed patterns 92a to 92f are each formed of ink having surface tensions of 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, and 42 mN/m. As a means for printing such ink on the resin layer 91, a group of #32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42 of "JUMBO SURFACE TENSION TEST PENS" manufactured by Corona Supplies Ltd. was used. The number after # represents the surface tension (in mN/m) of the ink contained in the pen.

之後,在等到經過了1小時之後,對於印刷 圖案92a~92f之狀態作了觀察。於圖36(d)中,對於經過了1個小時後之印刷圖案92a~92f的狀態之其中一例作展示。另外,一般而言,若是表面張力越高,則墨水越會被從基底(於此係為樹脂層91)而彈開,其結果,印刷圖案係容易變得紊亂。亦即是,在圖36中所示之印刷圖案92a~92f中,越靠右側之圖案、亦即是越靠印刷圖案92f側之圖案,係變得越容易從樹脂層91而剝離並變得紊亂。故而,當樹脂層91之印刷適合性並不充分的情況時,會成為以印刷圖案92a~92f中之其中一者作為邊 界,而在較其更左側之圖案中並不會產生紊亂,但是在較其更右側之圖案中會產生有紊亂。於圖36(d)中所示之例,係代表著:樹脂層91,雖然相對於印刷圖案92a~92d(表面張力為32~38mN/m的圖案)為具備有印刷適合性,但是相對於印刷圖案92e、92f(表面張力為40、42mN/m的圖案)則並不具備有印刷適合性。藉由實施此種試驗,係能夠對於具有32、34、36、38、40、42mN/m之表面張力的墨水,而分別評價出上述之3種類的樹脂之印刷適合性。 After that, after waiting for 1 hour, for printing The state of the patterns 92a to 92f was observed. In Fig. 36 (d), an example of the state of the printed patterns 92a to 92f after one hour has elapsed is shown. Further, in general, if the surface tension is higher, the ink is bounced off from the substrate (in this case, the resin layer 91), and as a result, the printed pattern is likely to be disordered. In other words, in the printed patterns 92a to 92f shown in FIG. 36, the pattern on the right side, that is, the pattern on the side of the printed pattern 92f, becomes more easily peeled off from the resin layer 91 and becomes disorder. Therefore, when the printing suitability of the resin layer 91 is not sufficient, one of the printed patterns 92a to 92f may be used as the side. There is no turbulence in the pattern on the far left side, but there is a disorder in the pattern on the more right side. The example shown in Fig. 36 (d) represents that the resin layer 91 has printing suitability with respect to the print patterns 92a to 92d (pattern having a surface tension of 32 to 38 mN/m), but The printed patterns 92e and 92f (patterns having a surface tension of 40 or 42 mN/m) do not have printing suitability. By carrying out such an experiment, the printing suitability of the above three types of resins can be evaluated for inks having surface tensions of 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, and 42 mN/m, respectively.

將印刷適合性之評價結果展示於表1中。在 表1中,「○」係代表並未產生有由墨水所成之印刷圖案的紊亂(墨水之彈開),「×」係代表產生有墨水之彈開。如同表1中所示一般,由丙烯酸系樹脂以及聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂所構成的樹脂層91,係相對於具備32~42mN/m之表面張力的墨水而具有印刷適合性。另一方面,由環氧系樹脂所構成的樹脂層91,雖係相對於具備32mN/m之表面張力的墨水而具有印刷適合性,但是相對於具備34~42mN/m之表面張力的墨水則並不具有印刷適合性。 The evaluation results of the printing suitability are shown in Table 1. in In Table 1, "○" indicates that the printing pattern formed by the ink is not generated (the ink is opened), and "X" indicates that the ink is ejected. As shown in Table 1, the resin layer 91 composed of an acrylic resin and a polyene-polythiol resin has printing suitability with respect to an ink having a surface tension of 32 to 42 mN/m. On the other hand, the resin layer 91 made of an epoxy resin has printing suitability with respect to an ink having a surface tension of 32 mN/m, but is similar to an ink having a surface tension of 34 to 42 mN/m. Does not have print suitability.

如同上述一般,聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,就算是 當被塗布於其上之墨水等的塗布液之表面張力為大的情況時,也能夠對於塗布液被彈開並導致圖案紊亂的情形作抑制。故而,當在補強部26之第1面26a上設置有第2裝飾部62等之構成要素的情況時,可以說係以使用聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂來構成補強部26為較理想。 As in the above general, polyene-polythiol resin, even if it is When the surface tension of the coating liquid such as the ink applied thereto is large, it is possible to suppress the coating liquid from being bounced and causing the pattern to be disordered. When the components of the second decorative portion 62 and the like are provided on the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26, it is preferable to form the reinforcing portion 26 by using a polyene-polythiol resin.

作為追加之評價內容,係藉由網版印刷法來在由環氧樹脂所成之層上印刷了墨水,其結果,係確認到起因於墨水被環氧系樹脂所彈開一事而導致的印刷不良。作為墨水,係使用了SEIKO ADVANCE公司製之1690N。 In addition, as a result of the evaluation, the ink was printed on the layer made of the epoxy resin by the screen printing method, and as a result, it was confirmed that the ink was caused to be bounced off by the epoxy resin. bad. As the ink, 1690N manufactured by SEIKO ADVANCE Co., Ltd. was used.

(實施例3) (Example 3)

對於環氧系樹脂以及聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂之耐衝擊性作了評價。具體而言,首先,係與實施例1之情況相同的,分別製作出具備有由環氧系樹脂以及聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂所構成的補強部26之覆蓋玻璃20。又,為了比較,係製作了並未具備補強部26之覆蓋玻璃20。接著,如圖 37中所示一般,使用打擊手段94而對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c施加了衝擊。另外,當設置有補強部26的情況時,覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c,係藉由補強部26之側面26c所構成。 The impact resistance of the epoxy resin and the polyolefin-polythiol resin was evaluated. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in the case of Example 1, the cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 composed of an epoxy resin and a polyolefin-polythiol resin was produced. Moreover, for comparison, the cover glass 20 which does not have the reinforcement part 26 was manufactured. Then, as shown As shown generally at 37, impact is applied to the side 20c of the cover glass 20 using the striking means 94. Further, when the reinforcing portion 26 is provided, the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is constituted by the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26.

作為打擊手段94,係使用長度35cm之不鏽 鋼(SUS)製的具有特定之直徑之圓棒。於此,係分別使用直徑為0.50、0.75、1.00、1.25cm之SUS製之圓棒來進行了試驗。以下,針對具體性之試驗方法作說明。 As a means of attack 94, a stainless steel length of 35 cm is used. A round bar of a specific diameter made of steel (SUS). Here, tests were carried out using SUS round bars having diameters of 0.50, 0.75, 1.00, and 1.25 cm, respectively. Hereinafter, the specific test method will be described.

首先,在載置台97之上,載置覆蓋玻璃20、 和被支持手段95所支持的打擊手段94。覆蓋玻璃20,係以使側面20c朝向上方的方式來作載置。支持手段95,係以使打擊手段94以另外一端94b作為軸並涵蓋90°範圍地旋轉,直到打擊手段94之其中一端94a從朝向正上方的狀態而變成朝向橫方向的狀態為止,並藉由此來使打擊手段94之其中一端94a與覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c相碰撞的方式,來支持打擊手段94之另外一端94b。於此情況,係能夠將依據打擊手段94之長度以及直徑所制定的碰撞能量正確地施加於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c處。另外,在覆蓋玻璃20之周圍,係亦可設置用以保持覆蓋玻璃20之第1面20a和第2面20b並防止當對於覆蓋玻璃20施加了衝擊時而覆蓋玻璃20倒下的情況之保持手段96。 First, on the mounting table 97, the cover glass 20 is placed. And the means of attack 94 supported by the means 95. The cover glass 20 is placed so that the side surface 20c faces upward. The support means 95 is configured to rotate the striking means 94 with the other end 94b as an axis and to cover the range of 90° until the one end 94a of the striking means 94 is changed from the state of being directly upward to the state of being oriented to the lateral direction. This causes the one end 94a of the striking means 94 to collide with the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 to support the other end 94b of the striking means 94. In this case, the collision energy determined according to the length and diameter of the striking means 94 can be correctly applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20. Further, around the cover glass 20, it is also possible to provide a state for holding the first surface 20a and the second surface 20b of the cover glass 20 and preventing the cover glass 20 from falling down when an impact is applied to the cover glass 20. Means 96.

在使用打擊手段94而對於覆蓋玻璃20之側 面20c施加了衝擊之後,實施4點彎折試驗,而對於覆蓋 玻璃20之彎折強度作了測定。 On the side of the cover glass 20 using the striking means 94 After the surface 20c is applied with an impact, a 4-point bending test is performed, and for covering The bending strength of the glass 20 was measured.

將耐衝擊性之評價結果展示於表2中。在表2 中,「○」係代表所測定到的彎折強度為500MPa以上,「×」係代表所測定到的彎折強度為未滿500MPa。如表2中所示一般,在具備有由聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂所構成的補強部26之覆蓋玻璃20處,就算是於使用直徑為1.00cm之打擊手段94來對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c施加了衝擊之後,也能夠維持充分之彎折強度。另一方面,在具備有由環氧系樹脂所構成的補強部26之覆蓋玻璃20處,於使用直徑為1.00cm之打擊手段94來對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c施加了衝擊之後,係並無法維持充分之彎折強度。 The evaluation results of the impact resistance are shown in Table 2. In Table 2 In the middle, "○" indicates that the measured bending strength is 500 MPa or more, and "X" indicates that the measured bending strength is less than 500 MPa. As shown in Table 2, in general, in the cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 composed of a polyene-polythiol-based resin, even a hitting means 94 having a diameter of 1.00 cm is used for the cover glass 20. After the impact is applied to the side surface 20c, sufficient bending strength can be maintained. On the other hand, in the cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 made of an epoxy resin, after the impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 by using the striking means 94 having a diameter of 1.00 cm, it is impossible to Maintain sufficient bending strength.

如同上述一般,環氧系樹脂之硬度,作為用 以構成覆蓋玻璃20之補強部26的材料之硬度而言係為過高,因此係較脆弱。因此,可以推測到,當使用打擊手段94來對於覆蓋玻璃20之側面20c施加了衝擊時,補強部26係至少被部分性地破壞,其結果,係並無法維持覆蓋玻璃20之充分之彎折強度。相對於此,聚烯-聚硫醇系樹 脂之硬度,係成為適當的範圍內,例如係如同上述一般而成為D50~D75之範圍內。因此,由聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂所構成的補強部26,係能夠藉由彈性變形來將從打擊手段94所施加之衝擊吸收。因此,可以推測到,就算是在被施加了衝擊之後,亦能夠維持覆蓋玻璃20之充分之彎折強度。 As in the above, the hardness of the epoxy resin is used as The hardness of the material constituting the reinforcing portion 26 of the cover glass 20 is too high and is therefore weak. Therefore, it can be inferred that when the impact means 94 is used to apply an impact to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20, the reinforcing portion 26 is at least partially broken, and as a result, the sufficient bending of the cover glass 20 cannot be maintained. strength. In contrast, polyene-polythiol trees The hardness of the fat is within an appropriate range, and is, for example, in the range of D50 to D75 as described above. Therefore, the reinforcing portion 26 composed of the polyene-polythiol resin can absorb the impact applied from the striking means 94 by elastic deformation. Therefore, it can be inferred that the sufficient bending strength of the cover glass 20 can be maintained even after the impact is applied.

(實施例4) (Example 4)

針對在實施例1中所使用之上述之3種類的樹脂之耐濕性作了評價。具體而言,首先,係與實施例1之情況相同的,分別製作出具備有由上述之3種類的樹脂所構成之補強部26的覆蓋玻璃20。接著,將各覆蓋玻璃20,在溫度85℃以及相對濕度85%之高溫高濕環境下放置240小時。之後,藉由目視來對於在各覆蓋玻璃20之外觀中是否產生有變色等之變化一事作了評價。又,針對補強部26是否充分地密著於單位基材22之側面22c處一事,藉由以手來把持補強部26、或者是藉由對於補強部26而使用在上述之實施例4中所使用了的打擊手段94來施加衝擊,而進行了評價。其結果,不論是針對具備有由3種類的樹脂所構成之補強部26的覆蓋玻璃20之何者,均能夠確認到補強部26之外觀以及補強部26之密著性係被充分地維持。 The moisture resistance of the above three types of resins used in Example 1 was evaluated. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the cover glass 20 including the reinforcing portion 26 composed of the above-described three kinds of resins was produced. Next, each cover glass 20 was allowed to stand in a high-temperature, high-humidity environment at a temperature of 85 ° C and a relative humidity of 85% for 240 hours. Thereafter, whether or not there was a change in discoloration or the like in the appearance of each of the cover glass 20 was evaluated by visual observation. Further, whether or not the reinforcing portion 26 is sufficiently adhered to the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 is used by the hand holding the reinforcing portion 26 or by the reinforcing portion 26 in the above-described fourth embodiment. The hitting means 94 used was applied to evaluate the impact. As a result, it was confirmed that the appearance of the reinforcing portion 26 and the adhesion of the reinforcing portion 26 were sufficiently maintained regardless of the cover glass 20 including the reinforcing portion 26 composed of three types of resins.

(實施例5) (Example 5)

針對在實施例1中所使用之上述之3種類的樹脂之耐光性作了評價。具體而言,首先,係與實施例1之情況相同的,分別製作出具備有由上述之3種類的樹脂所構成之補強部26的覆蓋玻璃20。接著,使用Atlas Material Testing Technology公司製之SUNTEST CPS+,來對於各覆蓋玻璃20照射光。之後,藉由目視來對於在各覆蓋玻璃20之外觀中是否產生有變色等之變化一事作了評價。 又,針對補強部26是否充分地密著於單位基材22之側面22c處一事,藉由以手來把持補強部26、或者是藉由對於補強部26而使用在上述之實施例4中所使用了的打擊手段94來施加衝擊,而進行了評價。其結果,不論是針對具備有由3種類的樹脂所構成之補強部26的覆蓋玻璃20之何者,均能夠確認到補強部26之外觀以及補強部26之密著性係被充分地維持。 The light resistance of the above three types of resins used in Example 1 was evaluated. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the cover glass 20 including the reinforcing portion 26 composed of the above-described three kinds of resins was produced. Next, each cover glass 20 was irradiated with light using SUNTEST CPS+ manufactured by Atlas Material Testing Technology. Thereafter, whether or not there was a change in discoloration or the like in the appearance of each of the cover glass 20 was evaluated by visual observation. Further, whether or not the reinforcing portion 26 is sufficiently adhered to the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 is used by the hand holding the reinforcing portion 26 or by the reinforcing portion 26 in the above-described fourth embodiment. The hitting means 94 used was applied to evaluate the impact. As a result, it was confirmed that the appearance of the reinforcing portion 26 and the adhesion of the reinforcing portion 26 were sufficiently maintained regardless of the cover glass 20 including the reinforcing portion 26 composed of three types of resins.

20‧‧‧覆蓋玻璃 20‧‧‧ Covering glass

20c‧‧‧側面 20c‧‧‧ side

22‧‧‧單位基材 22‧‧‧unit substrate

22a‧‧‧第1面 22a‧‧‧1st

22b‧‧‧第2面 22b‧‧‧2nd

22c‧‧‧側面 22c‧‧‧ side

22d‧‧‧第1側面 22d‧‧‧1st side

22e‧‧‧第2側面 22e‧‧‧2nd side

22ae‧‧‧端部 22ae‧‧‧End

22be‧‧‧端部 22be‧‧‧ end

24a‧‧‧壓縮應力層 24a‧‧‧Compressive stress layer

24b‧‧‧拉張應力層 24b‧‧‧ tensile stress layer

26‧‧‧補強部 26‧‧‧Reinforcement Department

26a‧‧‧第1面 26a‧‧‧1st

26ae‧‧‧端部 26ae‧‧‧End

26b‧‧‧第2面 26b‧‧‧2nd

26be‧‧‧端部 26be‧‧‧End

26c‧‧‧側面 26c‧‧‧ side

60‧‧‧第1裝飾部 60‧‧‧1st decoration department

62‧‧‧第2裝飾部 62‧‧‧2nd Decoration Department

Claims (29)

一種覆蓋玻璃,係為被設置於顯示裝置處之覆蓋玻璃,其特徵為,係具備有:單位基材,係包含有第1面、和與前述第1面相反側之第2面、以及在前述第1面和前述第2面之間而存在之側面,並含有玻璃;和補強部,係被設置在前述單位基材之側面上,並包含有樹脂材料,前述補強部之前述樹脂材料,係具有包含烯化合物以及硫醇化合物之聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂。 A cover glass is a cover glass provided in a display device, and is characterized in that: a unit substrate includes a first surface, a second surface opposite to the first surface, and The side surface existing between the first surface and the second surface includes glass; and the reinforcing portion is provided on a side surface of the unit substrate, and includes a resin material, and the resin material of the reinforcing portion A polyene-polythiol-based resin containing an olefin compound and a thiol compound. 如申請專利範圍第1項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述補強部,係被設置在構成前述單位基材之外形的側面上,並具備有包含前述樹脂材料之側面用補強部。 The cover glass according to the first aspect of the invention, wherein the reinforcing portion is provided on a side surface which is formed outside the unit base material, and includes a side reinforcing portion including the resin material. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,於前述單位基材處,係被形成有貫通前述第1面以及前述第2面之貫通孔,前述補強部,係被設置在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔上,並具備有包含前述樹脂材料之孔用補強部。 The cover glass according to the first or second aspect of the invention, wherein the unit base material is formed with a through hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface, and the reinforcing portion is The hole is provided in the through hole of the unit substrate, and includes a reinforcing portion for a hole including the resin material. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,在前述補強部之表面上,係至少部分性地被設置有呈現特定之顏色的裝飾部。 The cover glass according to the first or second aspect of the invention, wherein the surface of the reinforcing portion is at least partially provided with a decorative portion that exhibits a specific color. 如申請專利範圍第1項或第2項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述補強部之前述樹脂材料的聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂,係包含有20~80重量%之烯化合物,和20~80重 量%之硫醇化合物。 The cover glass according to the first or second aspect of the invention, wherein the polyene-polythiol resin of the resin material in the reinforcing portion contains 20 to 80% by weight of an olefinic compound, and 20 ~80 weight Amount of thiol compound. 一種覆蓋玻璃,係為被設置於顯示裝置處之覆蓋玻璃,其特徵為,係具備有:單位基材,係包含有第1面、和與前述第1面相反側之第2面,並被形成有貫通前述第1面以及前述第2面之貫通孔,且由玻璃所成;和孔用補強部,係被設置在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的壁面上,並包含有樹脂材料。 A cover glass is a cover glass provided in a display device, and is characterized in that the unit substrate includes a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface, and is A through hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface is formed and formed of glass, and a reinforcing portion for the hole is provided on a wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate, and includes a resin material. 如申請專利範圍第6項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述孔用補強部,係包含有從前述單位基材之前述第1面之端部起而朝向側方向延伸之第1面;和從前述單位基材之前述第2面之端部起而朝向側方向延伸之第2面;以及在前述孔用補強部之前述第1面和前述第2面之間而延展的側面,前述單位基材之前述第1面和前述孔用補強部之前述第1面之間的階差,係為10μm以下,前述單位基材之前述第2面和前述孔用補強部之前述第2面之間的階差,係為10μm以下。 The cover glass according to the sixth aspect of the invention, wherein the hole reinforcing portion includes a first surface extending in a lateral direction from an end portion of the first surface of the unit substrate; a second surface extending toward the side direction from the end portion of the second surface of the unit substrate; and a side surface extending between the first surface and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion, the unit base a step between the first surface of the material and the first surface of the hole reinforcing portion is 10 μm or less, between the second surface of the unit substrate and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion The step is 10 μm or less. 如申請專利範圍第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述單位基材,係包含有至少被形成於前述第1面以及前述第2面上之壓縮應力層;和位置在前述第1面側之前述壓縮應力層和前述第2面側之前述壓縮應力層之間的拉張應力層。 The cover glass according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the unit substrate includes a compressive stress layer formed on at least the first surface and the second surface; and the position is a tensile stress layer between the compressive stress layer on the first surface side and the compressive stress layer on the second surface side. 如申請專利範圍第8項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中, 於前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面處,前述拉張應力層係露出,前述孔用補強部,係以使於前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面處而露出的前述拉張應力層被前述孔用補強部所覆蓋的方式,而被形成。 The cover glass as recited in claim 8 of the patent application, wherein The tensile stress layer is exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate, and the hole reinforcing portion is formed by exposing the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate The stress layer is formed by covering the hole with the reinforcing portion. 如申請專利範圍第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,被設置在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面上之前述孔用補強部之被覆尺寸的最小值,係為20μm以上。 The cover glass according to the sixth aspect or the seventh aspect of the present invention, wherein a minimum of a coating size of the hole reinforcing portion provided on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate is 20 μm. the above. 如申請專利範圍第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面,係包含有:第1壁面,係與前述單位基材之前述第1面相交,並隨著接近前述單位基材之前述第2面側而朝向前述貫通孔之中心側延展;和第2壁面,係與前述單位基材之前述第2面相交,並隨著接近前述單位基材之前述第1面側而朝向前述貫通孔之中心側延展,之後與前述第1壁面會合。 The cover glass according to the sixth aspect or the seventh aspect, wherein the wall surface of the through-hole of the unit substrate includes a first wall surface and the first surface of the unit substrate Intersecting and extending toward the center side of the through hole as approaching the second surface side of the unit substrate; and the second wall surface intersecting the second surface of the unit substrate, and approaching the unit The first surface side of the base material extends toward the center side of the through hole, and then merges with the first wall surface. 如申請專利範圍第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面,係隨著從前述單位基材之前述第2面側起朝向前述第1面側,而朝向前述貫通孔之中心側延展。 The cover glass according to the sixth aspect of the invention, wherein the wall surface of the through-hole of the unit base material faces the first surface from the second surface side of the unit base material The surface side extends toward the center side of the through hole. 如申請專利範圍第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,在前述單位基材之前述第1面側,係被設置有 呈現特定之顏色的裝飾部,前述孔用補強部,係以與前述裝飾部呈現相同顏色的方式而被構成。 The cover glass according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the first surface side of the unit substrate is provided with The decorative portion of the specific color is formed, and the reinforcing portion for the hole is configured to have the same color as the decorative portion. 如申請專利範圍第13項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述裝飾部,係以當沿著前述覆蓋玻璃之法線方向來作觀察的情況時會與前述孔用補強部相互重疊的方式,而被構成。 The cover glass according to claim 13, wherein the decorative portion overlaps the hole reinforcing portion when viewed along a normal direction of the cover glass. It is composed. 如申請專利範圍第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述孔用補強部,係以呈現特定之顏色的方式而被構成。 The cover glass according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the hole reinforcing portion is configured to exhibit a specific color. 如申請專利範圍第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,在前述單位基材之前述第1面側,係被設置有觸控面板感測部之至少一部分。 The cover glass according to claim 6 or 7, wherein at least a part of the touch panel sensing portion is provided on the first surface side of the unit substrate. 如申請專利範圍第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述孔用補強部之前述樹脂材料,係包含有聚烯-聚硫醇系樹脂。 The cover glass according to the sixth aspect of the invention, wherein the resin material of the hole reinforcing portion contains a polyene-polythiol resin. 如申請專利範圍第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃,其中,前述孔用補強部之前述側面中的與前述孔用補強部之前述第1面相交的部分或者是與前述第2面相交的部分之至少其中一方,係被加工成圓角面或者是倒角面。 The cover glass according to the seventh aspect of the invention, wherein the portion of the side surface of the hole reinforcing portion that intersects the first surface of the hole reinforcing portion or the portion that intersects the second surface At least one of them is processed into a rounded surface or a chamfered surface. 一種附覆蓋玻璃之顯示裝置,其特徵為:係具備有顯示裝置、和被配置於前述顯示裝置處之覆蓋玻璃,前述覆蓋玻璃,係由如申請專利範圍第1項、第2項、第6項或第7項所記載之覆蓋玻璃所成。 A display device with a cover glass, comprising: a display device; and a cover glass disposed at the display device, wherein the cover glass is as claimed in claim 1, item 1, item 2, and item 6. The item or the cover glass described in item 7 is formed. 一種覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,該覆蓋玻璃,係被設置於顯示裝置處,並且被形成有貫通孔,該覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其特徵為,係具備有:準備工程,係準備單位基材,該單位基材,係包含有第1面、和與前述第1面相反側之第2面,並被形成有貫通前述第1面以及前述第2面之貫通孔,且含有玻璃;和塗布工程,係在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的壁面上,塗布包含有樹脂材料之塗布液;和硬化工程,係使前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的壁面上之塗布液硬化,而在前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的壁面上形成孔用補強部。 A method for producing a cover glass, which is provided in a display device and formed with a through hole, and a method for producing the cover glass, comprising: preparing a project, preparing a unit substrate, The unit substrate includes a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface, and is formed with a through hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface, and contains glass; and coating engineering Applying a coating liquid containing a resin material to a wall surface of the through-hole of the unit substrate; and performing a curing process to cure the coating liquid on the wall surface of the through-hole of the unit substrate. A hole reinforcing portion is formed on the wall surface of the through hole of the base material. 如申請專利範圍第20項所記載之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其中,前述單位基材,係包含有至少被形成於前述第1面以及前述第2面上之壓縮應力層;和位置在前述第1面側之前述壓縮應力層和前述第2面側之前述壓縮應力層之間的拉張應力層。 The method for producing a cover glass according to claim 20, wherein the unit substrate includes a compressive stress layer formed on at least the first surface and the second surface; and the position is A tensile stress layer between the compressive stress layer on the one surface side and the compressive stress layer on the second surface side. 如申請專利範圍第21項所記載之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其中,於前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面處,前述拉張應力層係露出,前述孔用補強部,係以使於前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面處而露出的前述拉張應力層被前述孔用補強部所覆蓋的方式,而被形成。 The method for producing a cover glass according to claim 21, wherein the tensile stress layer is exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate, and the hole reinforcing portion is used to The tensile stress layer exposed at the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate is formed to be covered by the hole reinforcing portion. 如申請專利範圍第20~22項中之任一項所記載之 覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其中,在前述塗布工程中,前述單位基材之前述貫通孔,係在前述單位基材之前述第2面側處而被作密封,並且,前述塗布液,係在被作了密封的空間內而從前述單位基材之前述第1面側起被作塗布,在前述硬化工程中,前述孔用補強部,係以將前述單位基材之前述貫通孔作閉塞的方式而被形成,前述覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,係更進而具備有:樹脂材料加工工程,係於前述硬化工程之後,於前述孔用補強部處形成貫通孔。 As described in any one of the 20th to 22nd patent applications. In the coating process, the through-hole of the unit substrate is sealed on the second surface side of the unit substrate, and the coating liquid is sealed. In the sealed space, the first unit side of the unit substrate is coated. In the curing process, the hole reinforcing portion is configured to block the through hole of the unit substrate. In addition, the method for producing the cover glass further includes a resin material processing process, and a through hole is formed in the hole reinforcing portion after the hardening process. 如申請專利範圍第23項所記載之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其中,於前述準備工程中,在前述單位基材之前述第1面上,係設置有被形成了與前述單位基材之前述貫通孔相通連的孔之第1保護膜,前述第1保護膜之前述孔的壁面,係位置在相較於前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的前述壁面而更靠向前述單位基材之前述貫通孔的中心側。 The method for producing a cover glass according to claim 23, wherein in the preparation process, the first surface of the unit substrate is provided with the through-formed portion of the unit substrate a first protective film of the hole through which the hole is connected, wherein a wall surface of the hole of the first protective film is located closer to the unit substrate than the wall surface of the through hole of the unit substrate The center side of the hole. 如申請專利範圍第24項所記載之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其中,前述準備工程,係包含有:保護膜形成工程,係在前述單位基材之前述第1面上,設置被形成有前述孔之前述第1保護膜;和蝕刻工程,係藉由將前述第1保護膜作為抗蝕層而對 於前述單位基材進行濕蝕刻,來形成前述貫通孔。 The method for producing a cover glass according to claim 24, wherein the preparation process includes a protective film forming process in which the hole is formed on the first surface of the unit substrate. The first protective film and the etching process are performed by using the first protective film as a resist layer The through-holes are formed by wet etching on the unit substrate. 如申請專利範圍第25項所記載之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其中,在前述保護膜形成工程中,係在前述單位基材之前述第2面上,更進而設置於與前述第1保護膜之前述孔相對應的位置處被形成有孔之第2保護膜,在前述蝕刻工程中,前述單位基材,係將前述第1保護膜和前述第2保護膜作為抗蝕層,而被從前述第1面側以及前述第2面側起進行濕蝕刻,在前述塗布工程中,前述單位基材之前述貫通孔,係藉由被配置在前述第2保護膜上之密封構件而被作密封。 The method for producing a cover glass according to claim 25, wherein in the protective film forming process, the first surface of the unit substrate is further provided on the first protective film. a second protective film having a hole formed at a position corresponding to the hole. In the etching process, the unit substrate is formed by using the first protective film and the second protective film as a resist layer. The first surface side and the second surface side are wet-etched. In the coating process, the through-holes of the unit substrate are sealed by a sealing member disposed on the second protective film. 如申請專利範圍第25項所記載之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其中,在前述準備工程中,於前述單位基材之前述第2面上,係被設置有將前述單位基材之前述貫通孔作密封的第2保護膜或者是密封構件,在前述蝕刻工程中,前述單位基材,係將前述第1保護膜作為抗蝕層,而被從前述第1面側起進行濕蝕刻。 The method for producing a cover glass according to claim 25, wherein in the preparation process, the through hole of the unit substrate is provided on the second surface of the unit substrate. In the above-described etching process, the first protective film is a resist layer, and is wet-etched from the first surface side. 如申請專利範圍第25項所記載之覆蓋玻璃之製造方法,其中,係更進而具備有:要素部形成工程,係在前述單位基材之前述第1面側,形成包含有裝飾部或者是觸控面板感測部之至少其中一者的要素部之至少一部分。 The method for producing a cover glass according to claim 25, further comprising: forming an element portion on the first surface side of the unit substrate, forming a decorative portion or a touch At least a part of an element portion of at least one of the panel sensing portions. 如申請專利範圍第28項所記載之覆蓋玻璃之製造 方法,其中,前述要素部形成工程,係先行於前述保護膜形成工程之前而被實施。 Manufacture of cover glass as described in item 28 of the patent application In the method, the element portion forming process is carried out before the protective film forming process.
TW104104748A 2014-02-12 2015-02-12 Cover glass, display device with cover glass, and manufacturing method of cover glass TWI647098B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014024782A JP6260322B2 (en) 2014-02-12 2014-02-12 Cover glass manufacturing method, cover glass, and display device with cover glass
JP2014-024782 2014-02-12
JP2014069994A JP6331127B2 (en) 2014-03-28 2014-03-28 Cover glass and display device with cover glass
JP2014-069994 2014-03-28

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201536541A true TW201536541A (en) 2015-10-01
TWI647098B TWI647098B (en) 2019-01-11

Family

ID=53800195

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW104104748A TWI647098B (en) 2014-02-12 2015-02-12 Cover glass, display device with cover glass, and manufacturing method of cover glass

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI647098B (en)
WO (1) WO2015122454A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009167086A (en) * 2007-12-18 2009-07-30 Hoya Corp Cover glass for portable terminal, its manufacturing method, and portable terminal apparatus
JPWO2013154034A1 (en) * 2012-04-10 2015-12-17 旭硝子株式会社 Tempered glass article and touch sensor integrated cover glass
JP5622133B1 (en) * 2013-10-25 2014-11-12 大日本印刷株式会社 Manufacturing method of cover glass

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI647098B (en) 2019-01-11
WO2015122454A1 (en) 2015-08-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6369047B2 (en) Cover glass and display device with cover glass
US20160239121A1 (en) Curved capacitive touch panel and method of manufacturing the same
WO2013057850A1 (en) Decorative film for display device, method for producing same, protective panel for display device, and method for producing same
CN108291993B (en) Window substrate integrated with polarizing plate and preparation method thereof
JP2012242928A (en) Touch panel integrating decorated transparent protective substrate
JP2013008272A (en) Decorative transparent protection substrate integrated touch panel and manufacturing method thereof
CN204242132U (en) Contactor control device
JP6488904B2 (en) Cover glass, display device with cover glass, and method of manufacturing cover glass
KR20140148204A (en) Window for display device and display device including the window panel
JP6331127B2 (en) Cover glass and display device with cover glass
JP6460467B2 (en) Cover glass and display device with cover glass
TWI647098B (en) Cover glass, display device with cover glass, and manufacturing method of cover glass
JP2014228615A (en) Substrate for protective plate, front protective plate with electrode for display device, and display device
JP6260322B2 (en) Cover glass manufacturing method, cover glass, and display device with cover glass
KR20190018215A (en) Cover window and display device comprising the same
KR20170088262A (en) Cover Window Glass Structure for Display Panel
JP6188403B2 (en) Display device
JP2019117392A (en) Image display device
JP2016103071A (en) Position coordinate detection substrate and display device
JP2012230304A (en) Method for manufacturing protective sheet for liquid crystal display, protective sheet for liquid crystal display, method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device and liquid crystal display device
JP6183706B2 (en) Cover glass and display device with cover glass
JP2013171223A (en) Liquid-crystal display panel component and manufacturing method thereof
KR20120134635A (en) Film assembly for protecting lcd window and method for manufacturing the same
JP2015099426A (en) Touch panel sensor
JP6376462B2 (en) Cover glass manufacturing method and display device with cover glass